Home

Telephony Manager 3.1 Installation and Commissioning

1. Mnemonic Description Restrictions AAA ABA Readrite AACD AACD Readrite ABDA ABDA Readwrite ADAY ADAY Readwrite ADCP ADCP Readrite ADV ADV ReadWrite AEFD AEFD ReadWrite AEHT AEHT Readrite p Telephone Profile data retrieved successfully OK Cancel Apply Help lava Applet Window To configure the Telephone Features page see Procedure 27 Configuring the Telephone Features page page 147 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing and configuring desktop services 147 Procedure 27 Configuring the Telephone Features page Step Action 1 Go to the Telephone Features page Use the drop down lists in the Restrictions column to configure each feature as ReadWrite ReadOnly or Hidden The Show drop down list contains All Hidden ReadOnly and ReadWrite This is used to limit the size of the list 2 Click Apply End Installing and configuring desktop services The following procedure outlines the steps required to install and configure Desktop Services Procedure 28 Installing and Configuring Desktop Services Step Action 1 Install Telephony Manager 3 1 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users page 135 2 Create accounts for Help Desk users and End Users as required 3 log on to the Web as Adminis
2. Name Connection Type Default Ethemet Network Setting TCPAR IP Address 47 11 10 Delete For a PPP connection type see Figure 43 System Properties dialog box Communications tab PPP Profile page 96 Enter all modem parameters and dial up information Select PPP in the Modem Script text box and enter the telephone number There can be conditions depending on your particular installation where you can be required to enter a modem access ID a modem password and a modem initialization string LLL Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 96 Before configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 e Set the IP address to the local IP address as configured on the system f Click Apply Figure 43 System Properties dialog box Communications tab PPP Profile Sample Site Sample Meridian 1 System Properties x General Communications System Data Applications Customers Profiles T Fena Profile Sample Serial ay E PPP ay com gt Beal om2 m Connection Parameters Data a Stop Bits Parit f z fi bit z None x Data Bits Delay secs Timeout secs fe bits z o s 6 fao m System Access Modem Script Phone Number Modem Access ID Modem Password Modem Initialization String m Network Setting TCP
3. commonName e mail employee number e User group e Web Reporting Access Rights For information about using the CND Directory to configure end users for access to Telephony Manager 3 1 see the Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 1071 Logon process This chapter describes the activities performed by Telephony Manager 3 1 to authenticate and log on Telephony Manager 3 1 users Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 164 Security Management Procedure 37 logon process Step Action 1 The user accesses the Windows logon dialog box or the Web logon page 2 User enter their logon name and password 3 Telephony Manager 3 1 performs authentication respecting the configured order 4 If authentication is successful user group resolution is performed as follows Navigator logon Windows or Web Ifthe user is authenticated using a local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account user group resolution is performed using the local account database Ifthe user is authenticated using a Windows domain account user group resolution is performed using the Telephony Manager 3 1 user database If the user group mapping is not found in the Telephony Manager 3 1 user database the CND Directory is used e If the user is authenticated using a CND Directory use
4. Checking local security settings Ensure the Users group has the access this computer from network and log on locally policies set before the Telephony Manager 3 1 installation is started This can be checked and changed using the following procedure ATTENTION If Telephony Manager 3 1 is to be installed on a computer that is within a domain you must check the policies on the primary Domain Controller In such cases contact your domain administrator to set the required policies Insufficient permissions results in PostgreSQL error during installation and the only means of recovery is to uninstall Telephony Manager and reinstall Telephony Manager again with the proper permissions Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation program features 45 Procedure 1 Checking local security settings Step Action 1 From the Administrative Tools window launch the Local Security Settings The Local Security Settings window appears as shown in Figure 1 User Rights Assignment page 45 2 Select the Local Policies gt User Rights Assignment 3 Double click the policies Log on as a Service and Access this computer from the network Ensure the Users group is present If it is not add Users to the policy Figure 1 user aa at eee amen eee OO O Eile Action Yiew Help 4 Double
5. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 130 Windows Server 2003 configuration 15 16 CAUTION Do not attempt to edit the Windows Registry Doing so may result in system failure Click Next The Audit Policy window appears see Figure 83 Audit policy page 130 Place a check mark in the Skip this section check box Figure 83 Audit policy Security Configuration Wizard Audit Policy Use this section to configure auditing based on your auditing objectives The suditing policy determines the success and Falure events that are fogged as well as the file system objects that are audited Auditing file system objects can degrade system performance and can result in a large umber of events generated Warning Any system access control lists SACLs specified in this section and applied via the resultant policy cannot be removed using SCW rollback is section this securkty policy will not configure auditing Learn more about audit policy lt Back ne gt cca Click Next The Internet Information Services window appears see Figure 84 IIS page 131 DO NOT place a check mark in the Skip this section check box Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009
6. Uninstall r Remove all installed features E Note Uninstalling T CND uninstalled by electing Comi Maintenance mode provides the following options e Modify Using the modify option the user can perform an install and uninstall of Telephony Manager 3 1 components such as Web Help e Repair The Repair option performs a reinstall of the existing installation application files of the existing installation without modifying the data files e Uninstall The Uninstall option performs an uninstall of the Telephony Manager 3 1 installation A warning is issued and the user is prompted to proceed Upon completion the Uninstall Complete window appears see Figure 144 Uninstall Complete page 242 Upon completion of the selected Maintenance operation the Maintenance Complete window appears see Figure 137 Maintenance Complete page 237 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 237 Figure 137 Maintenance Complete Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete plete setup e launch the Common Network Directory InstallShield Uninstallation of Telephony Manager Client or Telephony Manager Server The Telephony Manager client or Telephony Manager Server can be uninstalled separately regard
7. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 242 Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 Figure 143 Uninstall confirmation eteshony manager 3 0 Instlsheld wizard Do you want all of its fe Kana The CND components if installed are not removed during a Telephony Manager uninstallation The machine requires a reboot after the uninstall is performed Upon completion of the uninstall operation the Uninstall Complete window appears see Figure 144 Uninstall Complete page 242 Figure 144 Uninstall Complete Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Yes want to restart my computer now No wil restart my computer later CS 1000 Telephony Manager Before y disks from thes drives and then click Finish to complete setup InstallShield Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 243 Windows 2000 Server reference Contents Overview This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview page 243 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 on Windows 2000 Server page 243 Installing Network Adapter software page 246 Testing network cards page
8. Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Start Copying Files Revew settings before Setup has enough mformation to start c the pogram file any settings chck Back If you are sati ath the settings click If Custom is selected and Next is clicked the Choose Program and Data Location screen appears Figure 11 Program and Data Location page 52 Figure 11 Program and Data Location Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Choose Pro sstalied in the same folder as that of Core Program Common Data folder stores ory Manager data Install Sed Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software 53 The Choose Program and Data Location screen lists the features to be installed on the PC The list includes Core Program This cannot be deselected by the user However the folder selection option displayed within the Core Program Destination Folder group box allows the user to select the destination folder where the Core Program is to be installed Web Help files and Local Data are also installed in this folder English Web Help Installs the English Web Help files These are installed in the default folder or the folder selected for Core Program French Web Help Installs the French Web Help files These a
9. Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 131 17 18 Figure 84 IIS Security Configuration Wizard Internet Information Services Use this section to configure Internet Information Services IIS This section is dsplayed because the Web server role was selected aay jon is section this securty policy wil not configure 1S beyond enabling its services and configuring its ports Learn more about IIS security policy lt exk u cancel Click Next The Select Web service extensions for dynamic content window appears Place check marks in the check boxes to match those shown in Figure 85 Select Web service extensions for dynamic content page 131 Figure 85 Select Web service extensions for dynamic content Dy def out US serves only static cortert To serve dynamic content you must enable the Web Select Web Service Extensions for Dynamic Content 9 service extensions that your content requres Select the Web service extensions that the selected server requires W gt Active Server Poges gt Crogan PllesiWortel Telephony Mansger Tomcatbinssci redirector at F gt C Program Filesortell Tekeghony Manager WebServices OMNavignt or SystemMavigntor BnUISAPISy tem avigator A I gt Internet Osta Commector gt Server Se Inches r gt weboav I prohibit al other Web service extensions not isted above Learn more abaut Web serv
10. InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wiz you can use th rogiam you must restart your computer O Yes want to restart my computer now No wil restart my computer later o complete setup elephony Manager will not install or upgrade please launch the Common Network Directory etup from et disk InstallShield 13 Click Finish to restart the computer Once the computer restarts the installation finishes and the Telephony Manager logon screen appears ATTENTION User may see HTTP 400 error on attempting to log on to Web Navigator after performing an upgrade from one TM version to another due to issues related to Tomcat Performing a Repair operation on Telephony Manager will resolve the HTTP 400 error End Maintenance mode With Telephony Manager 3 1 successfully installed run Setup exe from the installation CD ROM to enter the InstallShield Wizard Maintenance mode see Figure 19 Maintenance mode page 58 Telephony Manager 3 1 can also be uninstalled by using the Add Remove Programs window For details see Uninstall using Add Remove Programs page 241 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 58 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software Figure 19 Maintenance mode Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager I
11. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 Document status Standard Document version 01 07 Document date 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license The software license agreement is included in this document Nortel the Nortel Logo the Globemark SL 1 Meridian 1 and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Personal Web server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Adobe and Acrobat Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated HP and OpenView are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Corporation Intel and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation Novell and NetWare are trademarks of Novell Inc Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc pcANYWHERE is a trademark of Symantec Corp Regular expression library Au
12. Or Edit the default file named LMHOSTS SAM This file is in the lt system root gt system 32 drivers etc directory for Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems 2 In the LMHOSTS file type the IP address and the host name of each computer that you want to communicate with For example on each Telephony Manager 3 1 client machine add the Telephony Manager 3 1 server name and its IP address Separate the items with at least one space Note that entries in the LMHOSTS file are not case sensitive Figure 155 Example of LMHOSTS file part 1 Ej Lmhosts Notepad ol x Fie Edit Search Help Copyright c 1993 1999 Microsoft Corp This is a sample LMHOSTS file used by the Microsoft TCP IP for Windows This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to computernanes NetBIOS names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding computername The address and the computernane should be separated by at least one space or tab The character is generally used to denote the start of a comment see the exceptions below This file is compatible with Microsoft LAN Manager 2 x TCP IP 1mhosts files and offers the following extensions HPRE DO0N lt domain gt INCLUDE lt filename gt BEGIN_ALTERNATE HEND_ALTERNATE 8xnn non printing character support Following any entry in the file with the characters PRE
13. Procedure 16 Setting up system data Step Action 1 Double click the Sample System icon to open the System window 2 Select File gt Update System Data 3 Select Update Data Stored in the PC Figure 48 System Update a Marrenance Configzation Secunty tities Window Hel WIPRO GIC CPP Update System Data x Compare the data shored in ve PC wth the Ere iotan dite are ep aadj Prec event Loo C tg Hob a as m panan reel coe OO in E 4 Click OK The system data such as the PBX type and software packages is copied into Telephony Manager 3 1 directly from the system When the data is copied from the system into Telephony Manager 3 1 the test procedure is complete End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 102 Before configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 103 Windows Server 2003 configuration Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions page 103 Web Server extensions page 104 Enabling Web Service extensions in IIS 6 0 page 105 Add a New ISAPI Web Service extension to IIS 6 0 page 106 Ena
14. Step Action 1 Choose Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 2 Double click the Phone and Modem Options icon 3 In the Phone and Modem Options dialog box click the Modems tab 4 If the modem on the computer is not already installed click Add If the modem is attached to the computer Windows can detect and install a modem automatically 5 In the Install New Modem dialog box click Next to continue 6 If the system is unable to detect the modem you must insert the modem manufacturer s disk that came with the modem and then select Have disk to install 7 If the system does not have a modem attached select Standard 28800 bps Modem from the list 8 Click Finish to close the dialog box End Installing Remote Access Service Procedure 74 Installing Remote Access Service RAS on a Windows server Step Action 1 2 3 4 Choose Start gt Settings gt Network and Dialup Connections Double click the Make New Connection icon In the Network Connection Wizard welcome dialog box click Next In the Network Connection Type dialog box select Accept incoming connections and then click Next Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 252 Windows 2000 Server reference 10 11 In the Devices for Incoming Connections dialog box select the appropriate connection device and then
15. will cause the entry to be preloaded into the name cache By default entries are not preloaded but are parsed only after dynamic name resolution fails A e lt B 2 G v 5 3 ad x lt g e a ad F DOM lt domain gt tag will associate the This affects how the To preload the host name associated with D0M entry it is necessary to also add a PRE to the line The lt domain gt is always preloaded although it will not be shown when the name cache is viewed Specifying INCLUDE lt filename gt will force the RFC NetBIOS NBT software to seek the specified lt filename gt and parse it as if it were local lt filename gt is generally a UNC based name allowing a centralized lmhosts file to be maintained on a server It is ALWAYS necessary to provide a mapping for the IP address of the server prior to the INCLUDE This mapping must use the PRE directive In addtion the share public in the example below must be in the LanManServer list of NullSessionShares in order for client machines to be able to read the lmhosts file successfully This key is under machine system currentcontrolset services lannanserver paraneters nullsessionshares in the registry Simply add public to the list found there zi Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyr
16. 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 305 Index A access restriction 167 rights 159 access permissions 137 administrators 137 add object to ENMS 194 Administrators user group 165 alarms 210 applications 99 197 authentication 160 168 175 B bandwidth 283 C capacity factors 258 configure Desktop Services 147 modem high speed smart modem considerations 150 configuring Telephony Manager 175 users 167 connection test 94 customer LAN 253 283 D Desktop Services 147 272 dongle 91 E embedded LAN 283 end users 163 EndUser user group 165 engineering guidelines 257 ENMS adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Server object 194 start Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications 197 F Fault Summary 200 set up 201 G General Cost Allocation System 258 H hard disk 275 hardware requirements disk size 276 HP OpenView 208 processor speed 276 HelpDesk user group 165 HP OpenView configure OTM Server 229 hardware and software requirements 208 installation and configuration 211 installation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 5 0 3 June 2009 306 Index Desktop Services 147 HP OpenView 211 Windows 2000 243 Windows NT component installation 244 network adapter software 246 J Java Runtime Environment 190 198 K keycode 89 L licenses
17. 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 213 Figure 117 Load MIB Look in a NortelNetworks gt amp c 2 OtmOpendlarms File name OtmOpendlarms Open Files of type fan Files 7 Cancel The Telephony Manager 3 1 alarm MIB definitions are now loaded into the NNM s MIB database End After the Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm MIB is loaded actions must be defined through the NNM Event Configuration for each Telephony Manager 3 1 event See Procedure 55 Configuring an event page 213 Procedure 55 Configuring an event Step Action 1 Select Options gt Event Configuration See Figure 118 NNM Main Menu Event Configuration page 214 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 214 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Figure 118 NNM Main Menu Event Configuration see 134 177 222 Segment1 m m Teel oTa 2 Locate and select otmOpenAlarmEp from the list of Enterprises See Figure 119 Event Configuration page 214 Figure 119 Event Configuration 4 Event Configuration 1 3 6 1 4 1 412 2 4 48 1 3 6 1 4 1 412 2 4 54 1 3 6 1 4 1 412 2 4 52 3 6 1 4 1 412 2 4 53 ENTERPRISES 1 3 6 1 4 1 Managex 1 3 6 1 4 1 2427 OpenView 3 6 1 4 5 nAlarmeE p ALL SOURCES ALL SOURCES ALL S
18. Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks System integration 209 PC software requirements HP OV PC e HP OV NNM Release 6 4 1 7 0 1 e TM3 1 Alarm Integration Package Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm MIB OtmOpenAlarm mib Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor OtmStMon exe Telephony Manager 3 1 software requirements Telephony Manager 3 1 PC e Alarm Notification application Web based alarm browser System integration HP OV NNM Network Map On the NNM Network Map See Figure 111 HP OpenView Network Node Manager Network Map page 209 a Telephony Manager 3 1 server can be represented as an object You can configure incoming events to trigger a color change to the object icon to indicate the current status of the Telephony Manager 3 1 server or of the devices monitored by the Telephony Manager 3 1 server Figure 111 HP OpenView Network Node Manager Network Map 23 134 177 222 Segment Map Edit View Performance Configuration Fault Tools Options Window Help 4 a ml e al 2 The Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor OtmStMon is the program that is used to update the color of the icon for a Telephony Manager 3 1 object When the color is changed upon the receipt of an incoming event a message is also logged and appears in the NNM Alarm Browser to indicate the status update Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June
19. If Cancel is clicked at any time during the installation the Exit Setup dialog box Figure 16 Exit Setup page 56 prompts for confirmation before terminating and rolling back the installation If Yes is clicked see Figure 17 Install interrupted page 56 the Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 56 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software 12 system is restored to its original state If No is clicked the installation continues Figure 16 Exit Setup a Figure 17 Install interrupted Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The wizard was interrupted before Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager could be completely installed E A z The sy fed To install this program at a later time run the installation again C UES Install Sieli Upon completion the installation Wizard Complete screen appears prompting the installer to restart the PC now or at a later time See Figure 18 Installation Wizard Complete page 57 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software 57 Figure 18 Installation Wizard Complete Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager
20. See Figure 94 End User page in French language page 158 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 158 Security Management Figure 94 End User page in French language Ble ESR yew Favores Jods teb ir On O A a Ah roes O Oe a whe O A Address tetps 10 20 0 5 End ser Engman asp SexcionlD 77HDA2E 2G3 49C2 IAP S LazSeb737elangetrocourtry US v EJGo Urks CS 1000 Telephony Manager R pertoire Mon profil Caract ristiques 2222 7 z 1000 AUTH 5 Code autornsadon 2595 AUTH 6 Code autorisation 6 z fees CONS OREON Authcode Unrestricted UTN e sp cifique de poste BFEA Am lioraton du filtr Aut tnet patron secr taire Authcode Restncted Code de cat gorie cis pauthcode Denied i CAc_cis eT AN CAC_MFC e oe de cat gorie MFC Touches Assigning access properties Telephony Manager 3 1 provides easy access to users for personal system site or network wide management of systems The administrator determines the level of access for the users in a particular user group The administrator also determines which sites and systems the members of the user group can manage Itis the responsibility of the network administrator to ensure that only authorized users can access the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and its associated system The administrator confi
21. associated 237 Uninstalling Telephony Manager Server with clients associated 239 Uninstalling Telephony Manager Client if able to access Common Data path of Telephony Manager Server 239 Uninstalling Telephony Manager Client if unable to access Common Data path of Telephony Manager Server 240 Deleting client information on the server manually 241 Installing the Windows server by using the Windows setup program 243 Installing Windows server components 244 Allowing Telephony Manager 3 1 client access without constant server log on optional 246 Installing Network Adapter software 246 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Procedure 71 Procedure 72 Procedure 73 Procedure 74 Procedure 75 Procedure 76 Procedure 77 Procedure 78 Procedure 79 Procedure 80 Procedure 81 Contents 15 Configuring TCP IP settings on a Windows server 247 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Dual Network Interface 249 Installing a modem on a Windows server 251 Installing Remote Access Service RAS on a Windows server 251 Testing the Nortel server subnet interface 253 Testing the Embedded LAN interface 253 Setting up the Metabase Editor utility 255 Creating an LMHOSTS file 288 Configuring TCP IP to use LMHOSTS on a Windows PC 290 Checking for a virtual COM port 299 Changing the virtual COM port to USB modem a
22. c Verify that the data lights on the modem flash as the ping data is sent to the system If a response is not received from the system verify that the IP address is the same as the one assigned to the local PPP interface on the system To verify the IP address go to the System Properties Communication PPP Connection Type dialog box and confirm that the IP address that appears in the address field is correct End COM port error In this scenario the modem dials and connects but the error message Error writing to COM port or Error reading from COM port is received Procedure 36 Resolving COM port error Step Action 1 Verify that the modem installed in Control Panel matches your modem type 2 Remove the installed modem driver and install a generic modem driver in its place a From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel Double click Modems Click Remove to remove the modem from the installed list Click Add to add a new modem driver oap p Select the check box Don t detect my modem I will select it from a list and then click Next f Select the standard modem driver matching your modem s baud rate for example Standard 28 800 bps Modem and then click Next g Select the COM port to which your modem is connected and then click Next h Click Finish to complete the modem installation LLL Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN
23. e Verify that you have the proper Java Plug In installed If you are not receiving traps from an Telephony Manager 3 1 server e Verify that the Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm Notification application is running and receiving traps e Verify that the Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm Notification scripts are configured to send traps to Enterprise NMS e Check the oitInstall log files to verify that the Telephony Manager 3 1 entries were updated e Check the status of Enterprise NMS daemons from Control Panel gt Services or by typing optstatus fe at the command prompt Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Troubleshooting 205 If you cannot launch Fault Summary for Telephony Manager 3 1 e Check the Application Launch entries FaultSummary is enabled for Managementserver gt Telephony Manager Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 206 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 207 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Contents Overview This chapter contains informati
24. page 233 Procedure 61 Converting a Branch Media gateway CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis system to CS 1000E CPPM Step Action 1 Run Update system data from the system window 2 Retrieve all Station data from the switch Before retrieving the Station data ensure that all the telephone records are in Sync status Transmitted use Global Edit if required End ATTENTION If the Meridian 1 11C Cabinet Chassis system or CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis system has a survivable cabinet or survivable media gateway attached and if the system is converted to CS 1000E CPPM then the media gateways will be deleted from Telephony Manager during update system data Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 234 Converting Systems in Telephony Manager Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 235 Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 Contents Overview This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview page 235 Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 page 235 This chapter contains information about using Uninstall to remove software that is no longer needed or that has become damaged or was incorrectly installed In Telephony Manager 3 1 the insta
25. the password are passed to the CND server In Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows and Web users are authenticated using the settings configured either on the User Authentication Web page or in the User Authentication dialog box The information that appears on the Web page and in the dialog box is identical The Web link to the User Authentication page is found under Web administration in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Navigator tree The User Authentication dialog box is accessed from the Security menu in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator Authentication methods The following user authentication methods are available e Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account e Windows Domain account e CND authentication Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Authentication 161 Any one of the three methods or a combination of the these methods can be selected to authenticate users on all Telephony Manager 3 1 platforms Telephony Manager 3 1 server Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows client and Telephony Manager 3 1 Web client The Administrator account is always authenticated as a Windows local account This is due to the fact that the Administrator account is the default account on these Windows platforms The default authentication method is Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account Because this method
26. 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 198 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Figure 106 Starting Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications Ej InfoCenter Resources Voice Management File Edit View Options Admin Tools Window Help peje Slx ole alee fm a alalals ols sje zaje 214 Objects 2 Change Count 2 Created August 3 2000 5 02 PM Last Modified August 3 2000 5 18 PM IE infocenter om Label Tyre SubType O Custom Fj 2 1 26 devic A Be Op If Ga Network Seeds Resources i Bridges Configuratior a ELANs Weblinks Hubs amp internet Open Probes Cu Routers Copy i Segments Net Aware Select Subnets Switch Communities Davee view Switches Properes GI VLANs WANs 3 aj aj Bej u al 8 Updating ResourcesiVoice Management INMS localhost Start August 3 2000 5 02 PM Java Runtime Environment for Telephony Manager 3 1 and Enterprise NMS Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications require Java Plug In 1 5 0_02 on the client browser Enterprise NMS uses JDK 1 1 x which is older than the version used by Telephony Manager 3 1 JRE clash for Telephony Manager 3 1 and Enterprise NMS Web clients In both coresident and non coresident situations Telephony Manager 3 1 and Enterprise NMS applications cannot be launched simultaneously The successful launch of Telephony Manager 3 1 and Enterprise NMS Web applications accessing JRE depend
27. 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 274 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Windows XP Professional IIS 5 1 Windows Server 2003 IIS 6 0 PC hardware This section describes the PC hardware requirements necessary to run Telephony Manager 3 1 optimally Use the guidelines provided in the sections Physical memory page 274 Hard disk page 275 and Processor speed page 276 See Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements page 33 for the following information Add additional serial interface cards as needed e Calculate disk storage requirements based on applications usage Implement a backup and restore strategy e Follow regular maintenance instructions as documented for Telephony Manager 3 1 features to maintain the integrity and capacity of the hard disk e Add disk redundancy as required e Increase performance by Adding more system memory Utilizing a faster hard disk or SCSI interface or both Using a faster CPU e Scale your PC for future growth and utilize a PC that Has a reserve PCI Card slot for a SCSI Interface Card See Hard disk page 275 for details Has a spare storage bay and power for adding an internal hard disk Can accommodate increasing the memory capacity to 1 GB or greater Most PCs have 2 to 4 memory card slots that can accommodate DIMMS of various capacity Response time testing is based upon the
28. 1 software requirements 37 software the non applicable associated hardware is deleted and a message for each deleted hardware Survivable Cabinet and Media Gateways 1000B is logged in the Event Log Multisession is not supported Two users cannot be concurrently logged into the same PC at the same time and have Telephony Manager 3 1 running Operating System and application requirements for Telephony Manager 3 1 PC configurations Table 3 Telephony Manager 3 1 configuration OS requirements page 37 Table 4 OS Service Packs page 38 Table 6 Application software requirements page 38 and Table 7 Third party software requirements page 40 list the required and supported software that run on Telephony Manager 3 1 PC configuration types Table 3 Telephony Manager 3 1 configuration OS requirements Telephony Manager 3 1 PC Configuration Windows Server Yes only Yes only No Yes 2003 Enterprise supported in a supported in a Edition non clustered non clustered environment environment Windows Server Yes Yes No Yes 2003 Standard Edition Windows 2000 Yes Yes No Yes Server Windows XP No Yes Yes Yes Professional Windows 2000 No Yes Yes Yes Professional Telephony Manager 3 1 cannot be installed on Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT Windows 2000 Advanced Server or Datacenter Server For Windows Server 2000 only the Standard Edition is supported For Windows Server 2003 only the Standard Edition and
29. 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 120 Windows Server 2003 configuration Figure 66 Processing security configuration database xi Processing Security Configuration Database 8 The security configuration database contains information about roles and other Features 9 Processing complete TY Yiew Configuration Database 4 Click Next The Role Based Service Configuration window appears see Figure 67 Role based service configuration page 120 Figure 67 Role based service configuration Security Configuration Wizard Role Based Service Configuration Use this section to configure services based on the selected server s roles and ether features These roles and other features are also used to determine settings in other sections A Answering these questions incorrectly might disable desired functionalty or enable undesired functionalky Before proceeding make sure that you have thorough knowledge of the roles and other features performed by this server Learn more about configuring services based on roles 5 Click Next The Select Server Roles window appears Ensure your selected server roles match those in Figure 68 Role based service configuration installed roles page 121 and Figure 69 Role based service configuration installed roles scrolled down page 121 and Figure 70 Role ba
30. 11C Chassis was originally called 11C Mini The 11C Mini was rebranded in Telephony Manager 3 0 Both Standard Availability and High Availability options share the same machine type for example 1000E CPPM This is consistent with the manner in which Telephony Manager handles redundant systems in PII and CPPIV Telephony Manager 3 1 supports the following systems and components e Meridian ITG Trunk 2 0 to 2 2 Telephony Manager Services ITG ISDN IP Trunks application e Meridian IP Trunk 3 0 3 01 Telephony Manager Services ITG ISDN IP Trunks application LLL Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 32 Preparing for installation e Meridian ITG Line 1 0 Telephony Manager Services ITG IP Telecommuter Wireless IP Gateway application e Meridian ITG Line 2 0 to 2 2 Telephony Manager Services ITG IP Phones application e Meridian IP Line 3 0 3 1 4 X and 5 0 Telephony Manager Services IP Telephony e MDECT DMC8 card and DMC4 with updated loadware e Meridian 802 11 Wireless IP Gateway Telephony Manager Services ITG IP Telecommuter Wireless IP Gateway application Telephony Manager 3 1 concurrence follows the life cycle plans of the Meridian 1 and CS 1000 systems and components with which it interworks Some CPU X11 release system configurations that have reached their end of life c
31. 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in English 3 1 English client or standalone 3 1 English client or standalone 3 1 English server installa tion Nortel Communication Server 1000 ENMS 10 4 CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Application Builder Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client Remote Gateway 9100 series Configuration Mgr previously known as Remote Office 1 5 2 1 6 0 1 7 PC Anywhere 11 5 Timbuktu Pro 7 8 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard amp professional 2006 McAffee VirusScan 9 0 NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Concord Edge Agent 5 7 ESM 1 1 CND 2 1 PCAnywhere 11 5 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard and professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan Enterprise 8 0i NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 CND 2 1 PCAnywhere 11 5 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard and professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan Enterprise 8 0i NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 262 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Windows 2000 Professional in French Windows 2000 Professional in German Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks IE 6 French IE 6 German Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in French Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in German 3 1 French client or standalone 3 1 German client or standalone Nortel Communicatio
32. 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 210 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView HP OV NNM Alarm Browser You can display contents of incoming Telephony Manager 3 1 events in the NNM Alarms Browser See Figure 112 HP OV NNM Alarms Browser page 210 Figure 112 HP OV NNM Alarms Browser All Alarms Browret heclpO2k us nortel com ovepad managed process netmon has terminated wud Tue Get 24 19 11 55 hselpO2k us nortel com ovspmd managed process ovtrapd has terminated w Tue Oct 24 19 11 55 heclpO2k us nortel com ovspud managed process ovactiond has terminated Tue Oct 24 19 11 55 hsclpO02k us nortel com ovspmd managed process ovcapsd has terminated w Tue Oct 24 19 21 56 heclpO2k us nortel com ovepmd managed process ovdbcheck has terminated Tue Oct 24 19 11 56 hsclp0Zk us nortel com ovspud managed process ovalarmsrv has terminate Tue Oct 24 19 11 56 hsclp02k us nortel com ovspud managed process ovsessionugr has terminat Wed Oct 25 16 06 19 134 177 222 210 Received event 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 3 3 5 0 10 enterpr Normal Wed Oct 25 16 06 30 134 177 222 210 OTN Server Status Critical MOEN Wed Oct 25 16 40 14 194 177 222 210 Received event 1 9 6 1 4 1 562 3 3 5 0 10 enterp Normal Wed Oct 25 16 40 23 134 177 222 210 OTM Server Status Critical Wed Oct 25 16 42 01 134 177 222 210 Received event 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 3 3 5 0 10 enterps Normal Wed Oct 25 16 42 10 134 177 222 210 OTM Server Status Critical MERGE ved Oce 25 1
33. 3 1 user account similar to Navigator users the only supported authentication method for end users is CND authentication For end users the following attributes must be configured in the CND users record through the Directory section of the Web Navigator e logon name When configuring CND authentication the logon name can be one of the following commonName e mail employee number e User group e Web Reporting Access Rights For end user reference information and for information about populating entries using CND import and CND sync see Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 For information about configuring users in CND see Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 149 Configuring a modem for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Using installation tools page 149 Configuring high speed smart modems page 150 Troubleshooting modem connections page 151 Using installation tools To ensure that a modem is configured correctly for use with Microsoft operating systems use the modem control panel to configure it The modem control panel automatically searches for and detects a connected modem and then stor
34. 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 142 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users When the user group name is entered into the User Group field in an Telephony Manager 3 1 user s directory record the entry must match the user group name exactly This is primarily a concern when Telephony Manager 3 1 is operating in a language other than English In this case the access profile name HelpDesk can have been translated into the local language To modify the access rights of a user group Step Action 1 Click to select a User Group 2 Click Edit End The User Group Properties Java application launches and the User Group Properties dialog box for the selected user group appears See Figure 91 User Group Properties dialog box Navigator tab page 143 Alternatively double click the user group to display the User Group Properties dialog box for the selected user group Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks User groups 143 Figure 91 User Group Properties dialog box Navigator tab Name Last Modifed Number of Users HelpDesk 12 8 01 3 53 49 PM 1 Navigator Telephone Application Access Right E Navigator 9 CI windows ITG Line 3 0 ReadWrite ITG IP Phones ReadOnly ITG ISDN IP Trunks ReadOnly
35. 63 Procedure 64 Procedure 65 Procedure 66 Procedure 67 Procedure 68 Procedure 69 Procedure 70 Viewing the Communications profiles 153 Verifying the modem connection 153 Resolving a failed session 154 Resolving COM port error 155 logon process 164 Configure authentication 168 Creating auser group 171 Adding auser 174 Configure Windows XP SP2 to work with Telephony Manager 3 1 185 Accessing the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server from a Web browser 186 Downloading the OIT files 189 Checking the current configuration 190 Configuring ENMS InfoCenter for Telephony Manager 3 1 192 Logging in to InfoCenter 194 Viewing Telephony Manager 3 1 server Object Properties 196 Modifying Telephony Manager 3 1 server Object Properties 197 Updating Apache Tomcat path 199 Setting up FaultSummary 201 Launching FaultSummary 202 Removing a Telephony Manager 3 1 server 203 Accessing the Telephony Manager 3 1 server from NNM 210 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm MIB 211 Configuring an event 213 Setting up a Telephony Manager 3 1 server object on the Network Map 219 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server Access 228 Converting a CS 1000S to CS 1000E CPPM 232 Converting a CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis to CS 1000E CPPM 232 Converting a Meridian 1 system to CS 1000M E system 233 Converting a Branch Media gateway CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis system to CS 1000E CPPM 233 Uninstalling Telephony Manager Server with no clients
36. 8 0i NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 ESM 1 1 CND 2 1 PCAnywhere 11 5 Norton Antivirus standard and professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan Enterprise 8 0i NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 CND 2 1 PCAnywhere 11 5 Norton Antivirus standard and professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan Enterprise 8 0i NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 ESM 1 1 CND 2 1 PCAnywhere 11 5 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard and professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan Enterprise 8 0i NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 266 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Any PC OS listed in above table that supports IE 6 Any PC OS listed in above table that supports IE 6 Telephony Manager 3 1 Web client Administrato r Ul Telephony Manager 3 1 Web client Desktop Ul CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Web client Administrator CallPilot Web client Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client BCM 3 6 amp 3 7 Web Management Interface CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Web client Administrator CallPilot Web client Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client BCM 3 6 amp 3 7 Web Management Interface Supported versions of co resident applications provides the supported versions of coresident applications ATTENTION The sections OS and browser requirements Third party software requir
37. Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 34 Preparing for installation Table 2 Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements Response time testing is based upon and supported on the minimum configuration as listed in Table 2 Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements page 34 For a Windows client some variables are amount of RAM on the Telephony Manager 3 1 client PC e the Operating System OS on the Telephony Manager 3 1 client PC e number of TNs managed through the Station Administration application e other applications that can run on the Telephony Manager 3 1 client PC including those that run in the background such as antivirus software e amount of traffic on the LAN e NIC on the Telephony Manager 3 1 client PC e deployment in the network architecture topology and placement of the Telephony Manager 3 1 client PC with respect to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The minimum and recommended CPU and RAM configurations are specified Some Telephony Manager 3 1 applications can run with less than the recommended configurations but performance can be degraded The Telephony Manager 3 1 server requires the following minimum hardware specifications listed in Table 2 Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements page 34 Minimum CPU See Intel Pentium IV Intel Pentium IV Intel Pentium III Note 1 Processor 2 GHz Processor 1 GHz Processor 600 MHz Minimum RAM 1 GB 1 GB 512 MB Minimum Hard Drive 2 GB 1 GB plus 2
38. Customer Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected See Figure 46 Customer Properties General tab page 99 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Testing the connection 99 Figure 46 Customer Properties General tab ci nnn x General Features Numbeing Pians CPND Customer Customer Name Numoer Se ee 3 In the Scheduler System ID box change the user ID and password to one that is valid for logging onto the system and then click OK HLOC appears the home location code ESN defined in LD 90 End Setting up Telephony Manager 3 1 applications Procedure 15 Setting up Telephony Manager 3 1 applications Step Action You must enable applications to make them available in the System window 1 Click the Applications tab The System Properties Applications tab appears Figure 47 System Properties Applications tab page 100 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 100 Before configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 4 Figure 47 System Properties Applications tab xl General Communications System Data Applications Customers Network m Applications Enabled tName Communication Pr Alarm M
39. IT D Background Intelligent Transfer Service BITS IF D Backup NT or 3rd party IT D Backup to local hardware I D Browse master I D Browser I D Content indexing I D Distributed transactions over RPC F D EMS command prompt channels Fa Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 124 Windows Server 2003 configuration ATTENTION Ensure the checks for the following Administration Options are removed as these options are not supported e Remote desktop administration e Remote windows administration e Terminal Server clustering Windows Firewall The correct selected options are shown in Figure 74 Select administration options page 124 and Figure 75 Select administration options page 125 Click Next Figure 74 Select administration options xi Select Administration and Other Options These administration and other options are used to enable services and open ports yew Select the options used to administrate the selected server IV gt Appication Experience Lookup Service IF D Backup NT or 3rd party IF D Backup to local hardware T gt Erc reporting IF D Help and support IV gt Unk tracking for users shortcuts I D Local application installation I Remote SCW configuration and analysis Programs can be added removed or repaired on tl I D Shad
40. June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Operating system migration 83 10 Consolidate and or edit the exported csv files as required to conform to the CND Subscriber Import requirements ATTENTION Use of Microsoft Excel for editing is not recommended as it performs automatic conversion that will corrupt the employee data End Database Migration Utility logfile The Database Migration Utility creates a log file that contains information on the systems that have been migrated and any record that could not be migrated This logfile named DataMigration log is found in the following location lt tmroot gt Common Data DataMigration log Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 84 Performing migrations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL Contents This section contains information about the following topics Overview page 85 Installing a server certificate in IIS page 85 Configuring SSL on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server platform page 86 Enabling SSL for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web logon page 86 Importing Telephony Manager 3 1 Root Certificate page 87 Setting up CND SSL page 8
41. Manager To do this the administrator must either enable a pre existing Web service extension or add a new Web service extension For Telephony Manager Web navigator to function 3 Web Service extensions need to be enabled in IIS Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 105 Enabling Web Service extensions in IIS 6 0 To enable IIS to serve content that requires the ASP extension and Server Side Includes follow the steps in Procedure 17 Enabling Web Service extensions in IIS 6 0 page 105 Procedure 17 Enabling Web Service extensions in IIS 6 0 Step Action 1 Open IIS Manager expand the master server node that is the Servername node and select the Web service extensions node 2 In the right pane of IIS Manager right click the extension that you want to enable In the case for Telephony Manager 3 1 choose Active Server Pages ASP 3 Click Allow 4 Repeat the above steps for Server Side Includes see Figure 49 Enabling Active Server Pages page 105 Figure 49 Enabling Active Server Pages amp Internet Information Services 11S Manager loj x C3 Ele action view Window Help ala x le gt ee B e 2 gt 1 i Internet Information Service B Web Service Extensions B BROBIN R18 local compi J Application
42. Nortel Networks is not obligated to remedy any Software defect that cannot be reproduced with the latest Software release These warranties do not apply to the Software if it has been i altered except by Nortel Networks or in accordance with its instructions ii used in conjunction with another vendor s product resulting in the defect or iii damaged by improper environment abuse misuse accident or negligence THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Licensee is responsible for the security of its own data and information and for maintaining adequate procedures apart from the Software to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs Limitation of liability INNO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COST OF SUBSTITUTE PROCUREMENT SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INACCURATE OR LOST DATA OR LOSS OF USE OR PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF NORTEL NETWORKS RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO NORTEL NETWORKS FOR THE SOFTWARE LICENSE Government licensees This provision applies to all Software and d
43. Pools J Web Service Extension status EJ Web Sites SY All Unknown CGI Extensions Prohibited fi Default Web site Allow Y All Unknown ISAPI Extensions Prohibited e jakarta aa s Active Server Pages Allowed E Web Service Extensh Prohibit Internet Data Connector Prohibited Properties 3 Server Side Includes Allowed gt WebDAV Prohibited Tasks Add a new Web service extension specific application EA Prohibit all web service extensions Open Help 4 inl Extended End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 106 Windows Server 2003 configuration Add a New ISAPI Web Service extension to IIS 6 0 To enable IIS to serve content that requires a specific ISAPI or CGI extension that is not already listed in the Web service extensions list follow the steps in Procedure 18 Adding a New ISAPI Web Service extension to IIS 6 0 page 106 Procedure 18 Adding a New ISAPI Web Service extension to IIS 6 0 Step Action 1 Open IIS Manager expand the master server node and select the Web service extensions node 2 In the right pane of the IIS Manager under Tasks click Add a new Web service extension 3 In the Extension name box type a friendly name for the extension that you want to add see Figure 50 Enabling new ISAPI extension page 107 4 In the Requir
44. Reporting Unit 90 Terminal Number 89 limitations software hard coded 266 operational 272 local users 163 logon 136 163 memory requirements 274 Meridian 1 programming 298 software requirements 297 modem 251 high speed smart modem considerations 150 troubleshooting 151 N Navigator access 141 Navigator users 162 network connection 183 network map 209 Network Node Manager access Telephony Manager Server 210 Alarm Browser 210 configure OTM Server 229 configure OTM Web Server Access 228 network map 209 set up Network Map 219 Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor 218 Novell 34 O Optivity Integration Toolkit 190 P password policy 161 programming Meridian 1 298 R Remote Access Service RAS 251 remote users 163 requirements Ethernet connections 297 PPP connections 298 serial connections 298 software Meridian 1 297 RU license 90 S security 136 security device 91 serial connection 182 serial number 89 serial ports 182 Server installation requirements 298 set up applications 99 communications information 94 94 customer information 97 97 system data 101 Windows 2000 243 243 software requirements HP OpenView 209 Meridian 1 297 supported systems 30 supported upgrade paths 32 T TCP IP 247 Telephone access 144 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networ
45. SSL for authentication and synchronization 4 For detailed instructions on setting up the CND server as well as an example of importing attributes to the CND Directory see CND Synchronization in Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks License management Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Serial number and keycode page 89 TN license page 89 RU license page 90 Client license page 91 Security device dongle page 91 Serial number and keycode TN license Keycodes supported on previous releases of Telephony Manager do not work in Telephony Manager 3 1 The serial number and keycode you receive with your Telephony Manager 3 1 software package determines the maximum number of terminal numbers TNs or telephones Reporting Units RUs and Telephony Manager 3 1 clients that can be configured in your Telephony Manager 3 1 system To purchase licensing for additional TNs RUs or clients contact your Telephony Manager 3 1 vendor TN license checking Each time you log on to Telephony Manager 3 1 your TN license is checked If the number of set TNs telephone TNs and virtual TNs configured in your system is approaching the maximum for your license the TN W
46. Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 134 Windows Server 2003 configuration Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 135 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users Contents Overview Capabilities This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview page 135 Capabilities page 135 User logon and security page 136 Access permissions page 137 User authentication page 138 User groups page 140 Installing and configuring desktop services page 147 This chapter contains information about e Web capabilities e User logon and security e Access permissions e User authentication e User groups e Desktop services For details on Telephony Manager 3 1 Web capabilities see Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 136 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users User logon and security Users log on to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web using their Windows userlD and password logon security for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web services ensures protection aga
47. System name 31 Address 44 City 24 State Province 24 Country 24 Zip Postal Code 16 Comments 255 IP Address 15 Timeout 60 Phone Number 50 Modem Access ID 50 Modem Password 50 Modem Installation String 50 Issue 99 System ID 16 Maximum Speed Call Lists 8 191 Maximum ACD Agents 1 200 PDT password 16 Customer Name 31 Directory Numbers 24 Customer Password 16 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 268 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Parameter Maximum Value HLOC Dial Intercom Group User ID Corporate Directory Maximum number of reports that can be generated at the same time Maximum string length of all parameters Maximum number of entries in Corporate Directory file uploaded to Large systems for example 61C Maximum number of entries in Corporate Directory file uploaded to Small systems for example CS 1000S Maximum number of entries in Corporate Directory file uploaded to Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Data Buffering and Access DBA Maximum number of Action records that can be defined in a DBA session Maximum number of Rule records that can be defined in a DBA session Maximum number of CDRs that can be collected List Manager Maximum number of speed call lists that can be created Maximum number of group call lists that can be created Maximum number of
48. Telephony Manager 3 1 software ATTENTION CND 2 1 is a mandatory requirement to ensure the proper functioning of Telephony Manager 3 1 If a previous version of CND already exists on your server or network follow the instruction in the CND 2 1 Administration Guide to upgrade your CND The Telephony Manager installation setup contains a folder with the CND setup amp installation files The file is lt 7M_Installation_Setup_Root_Direc tory gt CND Setup exe When the CND is installed on the same server as Telephony Manager either after or before the Telephony Manager installation to store database information it must be installed separately When the CND is installed on another server Telephony Manager can connect with the CND via the network For detailed information about installing and synchronizing the CND see Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 and the Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 Procedure 3 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software Step Action 1 Configure the Windows OS for Telephony Manager 3 1 installation by completing the following steps a Log on to Windows as Administrator b Exit all Windows programs c Install security patches as advised through Product Bulletins available on the Partner Information Center Web site 2 Double click Setup exe on the Telephony Manager 3 1 CD ROM Click Next Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manage
49. an event The invocation format for OtmStMon is as follows OtmStMon lt selection_name gt lt object_status gt where lt selection_name gt is HP OV NNM s unique selection name for an object item on the Network Map Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 219 lt object_status gt is one of the following textual strings Unknown Normal Warning Minor Major Critical Restricted Testing Disabled Managed Unmanaged If the Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor is not called then the color of the object that appears on the Network Map does not change for the incoming event If no object is defined for the Telephony Manager 3 1 server on the Network Map a call to Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor results in an error Therefore do not specify calls to OtmStMon if there is no Telephony Manager 3 1 server defined on the Map A call to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor results in a message in addition to the original incoming event message appearing in the NNM All Alarms Browser See Figure 123 All Alarms Browser page 219 This message is logged whenever the Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor changes the color of an object Not every incoming Telephony Manager 3 1 event necessitates the changing of the object s color For example a minor o
50. as part of the Nortel Unified Networking system The resulting integration provides converged LAN WAN and voice management and the capacity to monitor Telephony Manager 3 1 server activity through the ENMS For installation recommendations to create a secure environment for your Telephony Manager 3 1 data and users see Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 To configure modems for use with Telephony Manager 3 1 refer to Configuring a modem for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications page 149 When planning Telephony Manager 3 1 installations consider detailed hardware and software guidelines in Appendix A Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 30 Preparing for installation Telephony Manager 3 1 installation tasks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 involves performing tasks related to e new Telephony Manager 3 1 server standalone software e new client software upgrades e migrations e Web Help e license management These tasks are covered in detail in the coming chapters Supported systems Telephony Manager 3 1 supports the following machine types and managed system software releases Table 1 Machine types and switch software releases supported in Telephony Manager 3 1 System type Meridian 1 System type Communication Server 11C Cabinet 1 11C Cabi
51. click Next In the Incoming Virtual Private Connection dialog box select Do not allow virtual private connections check box and then click Next In the Allowed Users dialog box select the users that are allowed to connect to the server and then click Next In the Networking Components dialog box select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties The Incoming TCP IP Properties dialog box appears See Figure 147 Incoming TCP IP Properties dialog box page 252 Figure 147 Incoming TCP IP Properties dialog box Incoming TCP IP Properties 2 x Network access I Allow callers to access my local area network TCPAP address assignment C Assign TCP IP addresses automatically using DHCP C Specify TCPAP addresses From 1 0 0 1 To 1 0 0 255 Total 255 F Allow calling computer to specify its own IP address Coni In the Incoming TCP IP Properties dialog box clear the Allow callers to access my local area network check box Click the Specify TCP IP address radio button Enter the initial range as From 1 0 0 1to1 0 0 255 and then click OK In the Networking Components dialog box click Next In the Completing the Network Connection Wizard dialog box type the connection name and then click Finish End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Testing network ca
52. click the policy Log on locally e omx ER e Security Settings H E Account Policies Rd Access this computer from the net Everyone IUSR _W F E9 Local Policies H access this computer from the network Properties BE 9 Audit Policy ig C User Rights Assignment Local Security Setting E Security Options E Public Key Policies E Software Restriction Policies a IP Security Policies on Local Computer Access this computer from the network i Backup Operators Everyone IUSR_WHITEHORSE IWAM_WHITEHORSE Add User or Group emove 30 201 S01 S01 S01 Se Sol Sel S01 Se So sel aol sel Sel Se Sol o ol S01 Se el selfs cot __ See Figure 2 Log on Locally page 46 The Users group should be granted this policy For Windows Server 2003 the policy name is Allow log on locally Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 46 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software Figure 2 Log on Locally File Action View Help e Amx e Security Settings G Account Policies BS Act as part of the operating system E Local Policies 83 Add workstations to domain G8 Audit Policy 83 Adjust memory quotas for a process LOCAL SERVICE NE 3
53. data on the Windows 2000 Server system using the Telephony Manager 3 1 backup utility e Install Telephony Manager 3 1 on the Windows Server 2003 system e Transfer the backed up data from the Windows 2000 Server system to the Windows Server 2003 system Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 80 Performing migrations e Restore the backed up data to the Windows Server 2003 system using the Telephony Manager 3 1 restore utility Upgrading to Telephony Manager 3 1 To configure and manage PBX Release 5 0 the OTM or Telephony Manager software must be upgraded to Telephony Manager 3 1 Migration is supported from OTM 2 2 to Telephony Manager 3 1 The upgrades can be conducted either by direct upgrade or a two step upgrade upgrading from previous OTM releases to OTM 2 2 as indicated by the following actions The data migration is performed as part of the upgrade from OTM 2 2 to Telephony Manager 3 1 Note Do not attach the USB dongle until Telephony Manager 3 1 is installed The direct upgrade is a one step upgrade as follows e Telephony Manager 3 0 to Telephony Manager 3 1 Telephony Manager 3 1 uses the same database as the one used for Telephony Manager 3 0 therefore there is no requirement to migrate database e OTM 2 2 to Telephony Manager 3 1 This operation involves migration and up
54. faults for the selected device You can also set the fault management categories for alarm monitoring Integration requirements This section lists the conditions upon which Telephony Manager 3 1 integrates with ENMS optimally For optimum performance install Telephony Manager 3 1 on a separate computer from ENMS For more information refer to the OIT support Web site at www nortel com See Procedure 43 Downloading the OIT files page 189 for details e Telephony Manager 3 1 integrates with ENMS through OIT on any NMS platform See Checklist for installing the Optivity Integration Toolkit page 190 Coresidence with ENMS however is supported only on Windows 2000 Server All software requirements for Telephony Manager 3 1 must be met Install IIS before applying the service pack e Always install ENMS prior to installing Telephony Manager 3 1 There are certain restrictions in Telephony Manager 3 1 application features when installed coresident with ENMS e ENMS and Telephony Manager 3 1 use different Web servers Apache and IIS respectively Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 ENMS integration 189 In the Telephony Manager 3 1 installation when installing IIS make sure that the default HTTP port 80 is not used by both the Apache and the IIS W
55. group The Windows user group application was known as User Templates in early versions of Telephony Manager 3 1 New user groups are created using an existing user group as the base User groups provided with Telephony Manager 3 1 The following user groups and access definitions are shipped with Telephony Manager 3 1 e Administrators This user group has read write access to all sites systems and applications The Administrators user group cannot be changed renamed or deleted The other user groups provided with Telephony Manager 3 1 can be changed but they cannot be renamed or deleted e HelpDesk This user group has the following access privileges Access to all Web Navigator tree items except those located under the Web Administration branch Full access to Web Desktop Services including read write and synchronization capabilities Full access to the Windows Navigator applications with the exception of IP line IP Trunk Services e EndUser This user group has the following access privileges No access to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows or Web applications Web Desktop Services is read only however all except 21 of the most commonly used features are set to Hidden e Default This user group has no access to any Telephony Manager 3 1 features or applications Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2
56. group hunt lists that can be created Maximum String length for Speed Call List 9 999 2 045 2 045 1 255 characters 120 000 16 000 2 000 1 000 1 000 5 000 000 List Name 50 Entry Name 50 Dialed Digits 31 Speed Call List Entry Number 999 PLDN 31 Group Call list Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Software limits 269 Parameter Maximum Value List Name 50 Entry Name 50 Entry Number 19 Group Hunt List List Name 50 Maximum String length for Group Hunt List PLDN Dialed Digits Entry Name Entry Number Telephony Manager 3 1 DECT Maximum number of DECT Systems 500 Maximum String length for DECT system name 255 Password Unlimited IP Address 15 Telephony Manager 3 1 server IP Interface 15 Phone Number 64 PARI Access Right Identification tab SARI Access Right Identification tab Upstream Manager IP address Access Right Identification tab Web Maintenance Maximum number of maintenance commands that can be executed 10 at the same time in Web Maintenance Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Maximum supported number of clients that can log on to the 5 Administration page of the same Telephony Manager 3 1 server at the same time Maximum number of telephones that can be assigned to an end user 200 Data Buffering and Access DBA
57. in Telephony Manager so the user must manually convert the system This is a one time operation ATTENTION During conversion it is possible that the set TN license limit is temporarily exceeded prompting a warning message that this has occurred No action is required Once the old system is deleted after verification that the data in the new system is correct the number of set TN licenses should return to the pre conversion number To convert a CS 1000S system to CS 1000E CPPM in Telephony Manager follow Procedure 58 Converting a CS 1000S to CS 1000E CPPM page 232 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 232 Converting Systems in Telephony Manager Procedure 58 Converting a CS 1000S to CS 1000E CPPM Step Action 1 Perform backup of TBS and Traffic data 2 From Telephony Manager Navigator add a new CS 1000M E system See Adding a System section in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 60 1 3 Retrieve all Station List Manager and ESN data from the switch 4 Restore TBS and Traffic data from the backup location See to Backup and Restore section in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 60 1 5 Verify that the data is correct for the new CS 1000E CPPM system 6 Delete the old CS 1000S system from Telephony Manager End To conver
58. installation program Telephony Manager 3 1 server and client overview Telephony Manager 3 1 supports both Web and Windows clients The Windows GUI interface has different functionality than the Web browser interface The Windows GUI interface can be used directly on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server or on an Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows client Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 62 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software The Web clients operate as thin clients connecting directly to a Web server running on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server All operations performed using a Web client are executed on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The Telephony Manager 3 1 server requires connectivity to the ELAN subnets of the systems managed The Telephony Manager 3 1 client is a thick client that runs on a Windows PC It does not operate in a traditional client server model Rather the Telephony Manager 3 1 client runs similar software to that running on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The Telephony Manager 3 1 client communicates directly with the managed systems and therefore requires connectivity to the ELAN subnets of those systems The Telephony Manager 3 1 client must be operational at the time any operations performed on the client are scheduled to run The Telephony Manager 3 1 clien
59. nature of the log the Terminal server writes an end of file marker customizes in the Marker field at the end of the log entries The log records the time and date of when a client connects and disconnects to the virtual port and writes all text received from and sent to the host This allows a network administrator to keep an activity log of the virtual port connection e If this ASCII log is to be viewed from a Web browser the file is stored in a Web accessible path For more information on Virtual Port Properties Network with Logging disabled see Figure 102 Virtual Port Properties Network with Logging disabled page 184 Figure 102 Virtual Port Properties Network with Logging disabled Virtual Port 1 I Enabled Innovatia Lab MG1000T_Media Gateway 1 E Devices px Innovatia Lab Cancel cs1000S Network Settings Call Server sch lei Telnet Port Bee a Media Gateways Hel MG1000T_Media Ga F eue F TAF e a ER Sample Site L Sample Branch Office Serial Settings Ei Sample CSE 1000 R2 Bits per second Data bits Sample Media Gatew Sample Meridian 1 Sample Meridian Mail Parity Stop bits B ing en ooo Size kk J zm Enable All Disable All Ma Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 185 Configuring the Web browser client This c
60. port identified in Procedure 80 Checking for a virtual COM port page 299 is not within the supported range complete the following steps Procedure 81 Changing the virtual COM port to USB modem association page 301 to change the association Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Changing the virtual COM port to USB modem association 301 Procedure 81 Changing the virtual COM port to USB modem association Step Action 1 Close all applications using a COM port on your Telephony Manager 3 1 server 2 Open the System Properties dialog 3 If running Windows 2000 go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System 4 If running Windows XP go to Start gt Control Panel gt System 5 Click the Hardware tab 6 Click the Device Manager button 7 Expand the Modems node of the tree and select your USB modem 8 Right click and select Properties from the popup menu 9 Click the Advanced tab Figure 160 Modem properties page 301 shows an example for the U S Robotics USB modem Figure 160 Modem properties 10 Select the Advanced Port Settings button A dialog similar to Figure 161 Advanced modem settings page 302 appears Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 N
61. received by ENMS result in the change of status state of Telephony Manager 3 1 depicted in Optivity InfoCenter When ENMS and Telephony Manager 3 1 co reside on the same server the Telephony Manager 3 1 Trap system disables its Trap server and instead interfaces with the Optivity Trap server to receive traps Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Using FaultSummary 201 Upon receiving a system alarm or other traps that it is configured to handle Telephony Manager 3 1 reformats it and forwards it to ENMS ENMS recognizes the trap from OIT definitions and is able to reflect the changed status Procedure 50 Setting up FaultSummary Step Action 1 Select Application Launch from InfoCenter s top menu 2 Select the Fault Summary application See Figure 108 Modify Application Launch dialog box page 201 3 While holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys select the Managementserver gt Telephony Manager resource to enable FaultSummary for Telephony Manager 3 1 4 Click Apply End Figure 108 Modify Application Launch dialog box Description rrent faults in network Pathtrace application Pathtrace application Fault Pathtrace Pathtrace Fault Pathtrace Fault Pathtrace application Delete End Node Locator Fault End Node Locator application Ping Fault Launch ping App x
62. recommended configuration not the minimum configuration Response time performance is only supported on the recommended configuration Physical memory The amount of physical memory installed on the server is critical in achieving maximum performance on the PC Microsoft Windows systems have a feature called Virtual Memory Virtual Memory allows the PC to continue running programs that require more memory than there is physical Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks PC hardware 275 memory available It borrows memory using a memory swapping scheme from available space on the main hard disk Although this feature permits the PC to perform operations without worrying about running out of physical memory and thus crashing the computer it sacrifices performance of these operations by requiring access of the hard disk while memory swapping This degrades performance because e Physical memory access is much faster than disk access e Accessing the disk while memory swapping steals disk resources away from applications that need to read and write to the hard disk Hard disk Disk performance Much of the time spent by Telephony Manager 3 1 Features is in reading and writing data to the hard disk Features that spend a significant percentage of their time accessing the disk are called disk intensive applicatio
63. requirement to search the CND Directory for the user s assigned user group User authentication can also be configured using the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Services For information see User authentication page 138 Procedure 38 Configure authentication Step Action 1 From the Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator select Security gt User Authentication The User Authentication dialog box appears Figure 95 User Authentication dialog box page 169 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator users 169 Figure 95 User Authentication dialog box User Authentication x Users are authenticated upon logon to Windows and Web application Once logged in the user s assigned User Group controls access to specific applications Select the order of authentication methods to be performed at login Order Authentication Method X Local Server account fe m Windows Domain account Domain z x Common Network Directory CND Identifier Common Name 7 Web Endusers are always authenticated using CND authentication method only I Use SSL for Web login authentication cen 2 Use the check boxes to select one or more of the available authentication methods a If selecting Windows NT Domain account enter one or more domains in the Domain
64. source server 38 25 63 10 x acme com x client host 127 0 0 1 localhost 102 54 94 123 otmserver1 Use a text editor to edit the HOSTS file In the HOSTS file type the IP address and the host name of each computer with which you want to communicate for example on each Telephony Manager 3 1 client computer add the Telephony Manager 3 1 server IP address followed by its name Separate the items with at least one space Entries in the HOSTS file are not case sensitive Note that the HOSTS filename has no extension Telephony Manager 3 1 port usage When using Telephony Manager 3 1 to monitor and maintain systems various ports and protocols are used to communicate between Telephony Manager 3 1 and the desired client server or application Table 18 Telephony Manager 3 1 Port Usage page 292 lists typical port usage based on the flow of information between Telephony Manager 3 1 and these system components Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 292 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Table 18 Telephony Manager 3 1 Port Usage Telephony Manager 3
65. text box Separate the domain names with a comma ATTENTION The domain names must be separated by a comma Do not use any spaces b If you select CND authentication use the drop down list to choose Common Name EmployeelD or E mail 3 Use the drop down lists to assign the order in which the authentication methods are performed If choosing multiple authentication methods Telephony Manager 3 1 respects the order configured however it should be noted that the best performance is achieved by using the Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account method 4 To use the SSL during the authentication process the Telephony Manager 3 1 server must have the required certificate installed as described in Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL page 85 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 170 Security Management Select the Use SSL for Web logon authentication check box after installing the certificate If the Telephony Manager 3 1 server has the required certificate installed selecting the check box causes Telephony Manager 3 1 to use SSL encrypted transport during authentication In this case Web logon is performed using https rather than http and the traffic is encrypted The Telephony Manager 3 1 server automatically switches to non SSL transport when the user is successfully aut
66. the SCSI performance increase Disk size The Telephony Manager 3 1 server standalone software with default installation software and English WebHelp requires approximately 700 MB of disk space without any systems configured The minimum required server memory is 512 MB Each Telephony Manager 3 1 client connection to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server requires an additional 3 MB of memory You must reserve approximately 300 MB of disk space for virtual memory and normal OS operations Each CDR record needs 250 bytes of disk space At peak rates over a one day period this creates a 700 MB file Telephone manager requires approximately 14 GB per 100 000 telephones This does not include the disk space requirements for records in the Common Network Directory CND If CND coresides with Telephony Manager on the same PC add the space requirements for CND For more information see Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 Processor speed An increase in CPU power does not by itself greatly increase the capacity of the server The PC is so I O bound from accessing memory to accessing the hard disk that a two fold increase in CPU power may result in only a 10 percent increase in Telephony Manager 3 1 capacity Replacement of the motherboard not just the CPU chip can further increase CPU performance Because the newer motherboard is designed to take advantage of the high processor speeds for example fas
67. this section Firewall wall be enabled and IPsec may be enabled as necessary to support configuration and use of the firewall Learn more about network security lt exk e cancel 12 Click Next The Open Ports and Approve Applications window appears see Figure 80 Open ports and approve applications page 128 Accept the defaults ensuring inclusion of the following e Nortel Common Network Directory Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 128 Windows Server 2003 configuration e TMResource Manager e TMSingletonServer e TMTaskScheduler e TMWatchdog e PostgreSQL e Apache Tomcat Figure 80 Open ports and approve applications Security Configuration Wizard Open Ports and Applications The inbound ports listed below are used by the roles and administration options that you selected Selected ports are opened unselected ports are blocked 13 Click Next The Confirm Port Configuration screen appears see Figure 81 Confirm port configuration screen page 129 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 129 Figure 81 Confirm port configuration screen Security Configuration Wizard xj E S
68. to Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Services is provided through the server Refer to User authentication page 138 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Creating a user group 171 Procedure 39 Creating a user group Step Action 1 In the Navigator window choose Security gt User Groups to display the User Groups window Figure 96 User Groups window page 171 Figure 96 User Groups window E User Groups Of x Eile Edit View Configuration Help 5 SIR x elel t User Group Number In Use 12 08 01 15 51 57 12 08 01 15 58 45 12 08 01 16 45 04 12 08 01 15 53 49 For Help press F1 2 Choose Configuration gt Add User Group The new user group is created with the same access privileges as the highlighted user group The New User Group Properties dialog box appears Figure 97 New User Group Properties dialog box page 172 The Administrators Default EndUser and HelpDesk User Groups are always available and cannot be deleted All groups except for Administrators can be modified The Administrators User Group has access to all Windows based and Web based Telephony Manager 3 1 applications Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 172 Security Man
69. user is defined as restricted from any access to all sites systems and applications in the Navigator the user can in fact see all the sites and systems in the Navigator tree and has read only access to their properties If restricted users try to open a system they see a System Window with no applications visible Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 168 Security Management Sites and systems displayed in user groups When adding or modifying a user group only systems that have applications enabled are presented If no applications are enabled for the systems within a given site the site and system s do not appear in the User Group Properties dialog box For information about configuring end users for access to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web site see User groups page 140 User authentication Any of the following three methods or combination of these methods can be used to authenticate Telephony Manager 3 1 users e Local Server account Windows NT Domain account CND authentication The Administrator account is always authenticated through the local server account because it is a default account on all supported Windows platforms The default authentication method is the Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account This method provides the best logon performance because there is no
70. when the user is successfully authenticated e If CND authentication is used the following sequence is used The Telephony Manager 3 1 server tests to determine whether the Directory server offers SSL based authentication lf SSL is supported by the Directory server passwords are encrypted before transmission using a Public Private key pair negotiated through the CND mechanism lf SSL is not supported passwords are transmitted as clear text All passwords including passwords to access the system are stored in the Telephony Manager 3 1 database in an encrypted format Crypto API the standard Windows Security Provider encryption service is used for this purpose Blank passwords Telephony Manager 3 1 does not support blank passwords User management There are two major categories of users within Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator users and end users Access for these users is controlled by configuring Navigator users in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Users window and end users in the Employee Editor Navigator users Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator and Web Navigator users are managed through Telephony Manager 3 1 User administration Users are created and assigned to a particular user group This user group assignment controls access to Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows and Web applications Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3
71. with routed connections Telephony Manager 3 1 server with Telephony Manager 3 1 clients In this configuration the Telephony Manager 3 1 server is connected to a number of Telephony Manager 3 1 clients all on the same LAN due to bandwidth and other restrictions There may be optional Web clients Here routed connections are used from the Telephony Manager 3 1 server clients to the ELAN subnets of managed systems through the Nortel server subnet Figure 152 Telephony Manager 3 1 server with Telephony Manager 3 1 clients page 282 illustrates this configuration Figure 152 Telephony Manager 3 1 server with Telephony Manager 3 1 clients ELAN Subnet T ES ae TM Server and Clients may be on any gt subnet of same LAN k _ Nortel Networks Server Subnet Router Layer Three Switch Other Subnet s Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Network bandwidth 283 Because Telephony Manager 3 1 clients cannot be connected to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server across a WAN to get full GUI capabilities across a WAN Nortel recommends that pcAnywhere be used to connect to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server or Telephony Manager 3 1 clients VPN connections Telephony Manager 3 1 does not have any special support for Virtual Private Network VPN connections It is p
72. 0 go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Phone and Modem Options 2 From Windows XP go to Start gt Control Panel gt Phone and Modem Options Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 300 Appendix C Configuring a USB modem Figure 159 Phone and modem options Diaing Rules Modems Advanced 3 The following modems are instaled U S Robotics 56K Faxmodem USB coM3 Add Remove Poze nee 3 Click the Modems tab see Figure 159 Phone and modem options page 300 The modem appears in the list 4 If the modem is not connected to the computer it does not appear in the installed modems list Connect the modem and repeat steps 1 3 If your modem is connected to your server and is properly installed but still does not appear in this list Telephony Manager 3 1 does not support your modem 5 Take note of the COM port your modem is associated with as indicated in the Attached To column in Figure 159 Phone and modem options page 300 This is the COM port you need to select when configuring the Dial up parameters for a collection task in the Telecom Billing System End Changing the virtual COM port to USB modem association Telephony Manager 3 1 requires your USB modem to be associated with a COM port in the range between COM1 and COM10 If the virtual COM
73. 00 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 76 Performing a keycode upgrade Figure 35 Keycode upgrade Utilities menu ITG IP Phones ITG IP Telecommuter Wireless IP Gateway ITG ISDN IP Trunks ITG M1 IP Trk a Sample site p tet 10 20 30 66 100 20 10 6 2 The Keycode Upgrade dialog box appears see Figure 36 Keycode Upgrade dialog box page 76 providing details of the currently available licenses and a keycode entry facility to upgrade the keycode Enter the appropriate information and click Upgrade Figure 36 Keycode Upgrade dialog box l ecycode Upgrade Downgrade 3 The Confirm Keycode Upgrade dialog box appears see Figure 37 Confirm Keycode Upgrade dialog box page 77 Click yes to proceed Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Keycode upgrade 77 Figure 37 Confirm Keycode Upgrade dialog box x The new keycode will change the licenses as follows TN Licenses upgrade from 25000 to 50000 RU Licenses upgrade from 50 to 100 Clients upgrade from 10 to 128 Billing package upgrade from General to Enhanced Do you want to proceed with the upgrade a End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Comm
74. 00 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 system performance 285 The alarm circular queue can be quickly exhausted if there is significant alarm traffic Operational measurement processing Voice Gateway Media cards collect operational measurement OM information about an hourly basis This data is stored on the cards until it is retrieved by Telephony Manager 3 1 using an FTP operation The data can be retrieved on demand however the FTP operation is normally scheduled to occur on a daily basis The data file generated by an Voice Gateway Media card in a 24 hour period is approximately 5 KB When retrieval occurs the information is collected from all cards on all nodes There is no capability to retrieve the information about an individual node basis The retrieved information is parsed and written to comma separated values CSV files on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The number of files created is dependent upon the number of records retrieved If there are many cards in the system the retrieval operation should be scheduled to occur during off hours Telephony Manager 3 1 system performance Network impact on Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows client server As mentioned in Telephony Manager 3 1 server and client overview page 61 the Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows clients do not operate in a typical client
75. 009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 160 Security Management With the exception of Administrators do not place a person in multiple groups The first group detected by Telephony Manager 3 1 is used to determine access permissions There is no restriction on the Administrators group Users may belong to other groups but if they belong to the Administrators group the Administrators profile overrides all other profiles There is a Default user category Default users can successfully log on to the Web Navigator but they do not have a user group defined in their Directory record Telephony Manager 3 1 administrators and Help desk users have user accounts in a Windows domain End users may have accounts either in a Windows domain or through a CND server Telephony Manager 3 1 administrators and Help desk users can access and change their own telephones through either the Web Navigator or the Desktop Services end user pages Access to the end user pages requires the appropriate CND Directory setup user logon and user group for these administrators and Help desk users Authentication Authentication requests are passed to Telephony Manager 3 1 Watchdog which applies the configured authentication method and creates a session for the user For authentication on Local Server account or Windows Domain account the standard Windows Security Provider is used For authentication using CND Authentication for end users the logon name and
76. 009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 166 Security Management User management recommendations The Administrator user account for the Windows OS does not appear in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Users window This is to prevent users from changing the Administrator account password from within Telephony Manager 3 1 Even though it is not listed in the Users window the OS Administrator account can always be used to log on to Telephony Manager 3 1 Nortel strongly recommends that a new user group be created in Telephony Manager 3 1 based on the Administrators user group Telephony Manager 3 1 users should be assigned to this new user group instead of adding them to the Administrators user group This is a security measure to ensure that a user with administrative access to Telephony Manager 3 1 does not also have access to the OS on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server as a member of the Administrators group Installation Fresh installation In a fresh installation three new user groups are created in Windows Telephony Manager 3 1 utilizes HelpDesk EndUser and Default user groups along with the existing Administrators group For Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows clients the Telephony Manager 3 1 server s host name must be provided during installation The host name is saved in the registry Upgrade In an upgrade existing Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Templates are created as user groups By default these groups do not have access to T
77. 03 2009 Nortel Networks 240 Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 If the Telephony Manager Client can access the Common Data path of the Telephony Manager Server during uninstallation a confirmation message displays as shown in Figure 141 Telephony Manager Client uninstall confirmation with access to the server page 240 Figure 141 Telephony Manager Client uninstall confirmation with access to the server Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard xj Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of ts features _ oe 2 Click Yes to continue the Telephony Manager Client uninstallation 3 Click No to cancel the uninstallation End Procedure 65 Uninstalling Telephony Manager Client if unable to access Common Data path of Telephony Manager Server Step Action 1 Select the Uninstall radio button from the Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard as shown in Figure 138 Telephony Manager InstallShield wizard page 238 If the Telephony Manager Client can not access the Common Data path of the Telephony Manager Server during uninstallation a confirmation message displays as shown in Figure 142 Telephony Manager Client uninstall confirmation with no access to the server page 240 Figure 142 Telephony Manager Client uninstall confirmation with no access to the server Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallSheild Wizard i xi Server is unavailable IF you pro
78. 09 Nortel Networks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software 51 nnn rrr nner ee Enter the user information and keycode Click Next to continue At this point the installation decides which applications to install based on the keycode entered If the keycode is invalid an error message appears see Figure 8 Invalid keycode error page 51 There are no restrictions on the number of keycode entry attempts Figure 8 Invalid keycode error Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstaliSiveld 7 The Setup Type page screen appears Figure 9 Setup Type page 51 providing a choice of either default or custom installation options Figure 9 Setup Type Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Select the setup type to install Please select a setup type O Default A program feat ogam and English Web Help will be installed These will be installed o rider to be installed and program folders w Install Sied If Default is selected and Next is clicked the Start Copying Files screen appears Figure 10 Start Copying Files screen page 52 which provides a summary of the installation which can be reviewed Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 52 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software a en nnn TT Figure 10 Start Copying Files screen
79. 1 Sending To Port Type Protocol Component Remarks Meridian 1 or 513 TCP Rlogon Session Connect System Using netstat Communication Terminal Station Admin server 1000 CPND List manager system ESN Meridian 1 or 161 UDP SNMP Alarm Management Microsoft Communication Maintenance Window Default Port server 1000 system Meridian 1 or 21 TCP FTP Corporate Directory amp Microsoft Communication DBA Default Port server 1000 system Meridian 1 or 20 TCP FTP Corporate Directory amp Microsoft Communication DBA Default Port server 1000 FTP data system SMTP server 25 TCP SMTP Alarm Notification Microsoft Default Port IP Line IP Trunk 21 TCP FTP Telephony Manager 3 1 Microsoft Default Port Win client 139 TCP NetBEUI Windows client File Microsoft Sharing Default Port CND server 389 TCP CND CND Synchronization Microsoft Default Port CND server Over 636 TCP CND synchronization Microsoft SSL Default Port CND SSL Telephony Manager 3 1 Port Type Protocol Component Remarks Receiving From Web client 80 TCP HTTP Web CS Desktop Microsoft Services Web telecom Default Port billing system Web client 8080 TCP HTTP telephone manager Apache Tomcat Web Server Telephony Manager 3 1 Sending To Port Web client Win client Win client Type Protocol TCP NetBEUI TCP UDP Telephony Manager 3 1 port usage 293 Component Virtual System Terminal VT uses 7 port per session Start with 4789 Windows client File Sharing logon Re
80. 253 This chapter describes Windows 2000 installation Due to hardware and software differences this example may not match your installation If a certain component is already correctly installed then skip the installation of that component Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 on Windows 2000 Server Hardware compatibility check Check all hardware against the documentation available on Microsoft s Web site at www microsoft com windows2000 support onlinedocs default mspx Running the Windows setup program Procedure 67 Installing the Windows server by using the Windows setup program Step Action This procedure shows you how to install Windows server using the setup program 1 Make sure the first bootup option on CD ROM in the BIOS is enabled 2 Insert the Windows server setup CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 244 Windows 2000 Server reference 10 11 12 Boot the system In the Windows server Setup Welcome dialog box press Enter to set up the Windows server In the Windows Licensing Agreement dialog box press Page Down to go to the bottom of the page and then choose F8 Press C to create a partition and then type the size of the partition that you want to create Use the up and down arrow keys to select the partition created on the fir
81. 39 Figure 89 User Authentication page Nartel CS 1000 Telephony Manager Macrosolt Internet Explorer provided by Nortel Networks Fie Edt Wew Favertes Tods Help Back gt O A Al Asowch Giraveetes reds G D SH a Address 4 https 47 11 221 161 Omilsvigator Mer Mevigstor Engidet auk asp SessionIDe0 ibeS3 4404 4b1 0 91 47 b201 99671 4e NORTEL CS 1000 Telephony Manager Equipment Curent sti User Authentication System Navigator System Alarms Users are authenticated upon logon to Windows and Web application F pz pae Once logged in the user s assigned User Group controls access to specific apphcstions Add Select the order af authentication methods to be performed at login Templates liotan Order Authenticaton Method Syne Logs 1 gt Local Server account Pest 2 X Windows Domain account Preferences Dorain E Directory Search 3 z Common Network Directory CND poe Indentifier Common Name le Telecom Billing Reports Web Endusers are a usng CND authentication Web T68 method only Sync Reports barren ag I Use SSL for Web login authentication User Authentication User Groups Session Monitor Language Selection a 2 Use the check boxes to select one or more of the available authentication methods If CND authentication is selected use the drop down list to choose either Common Name EmployeelD or E mail 3 Use the drop down lists to assign the order in which the authentication methods are performed If multiple aut
82. 4 To specify the location of the file that you want to import into the LMHOSTS file click Import LMHOSTS and then select the file in the Open dialog box 5 To complete the configuration either a Reboot the computer Or b Go to the command prompt and enter the following text nbstat R nbstat c End HOSTS file The HOSTS file contains a list of host name to IP address mappings It is a regular text file The HOSTS file is located in the lt system root gt system 32 drivers etc directory for Windows XP and Windows 2000 systems See Figure 157 Sample HOSTS file page 291 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 port usage 291 Figure 157 Sample HOSTS file B Hosts Notepad OF x File Edit Search Help Copyright c 1993 1999 Microsoft Corp This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space Additionally comments such as these may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com
83. 43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 156 Configuring a modem for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications i Restart the system and try to establish a PPP or serial connection End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 157 Security Management When Telephony Manager 3 1 starts for the first time the Administrator HelpDesk EndUser and Default user groups are the only active user groups You must assign access properties for any other groups that you have set up on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server Localization Important advice for regionalized operating systems The name of the administrators user group in the French and German OS is not Administrators These names are localized by Microsoft in the regional OS software In a default French Windows installation the local administrators user group is Administrateurs In the German version this user group is Administratoren When installed on a French or German OS the Telephony Manager 3 1 predefined administrators user group is named Administrateurs or Administratoren to match the OS When an End User logs into the German or French version of the Telephone Details page of an IP phone set the list of feature values is displayed only in English The values are not translated into German or French
84. 47 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software 61 Contents 61 Overview 61 Installing the client software 64 Performing a keycode upgrade 75 Contents 75 Keycode upgrade 75 Performing migrations 79 Contents 79 Upgrades and migration 79 Upgrading to Telephony Manager 3 1 80 Operating system migration 80 Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL 85 Contents 85 Overview 85 Installing a server certificate in IIS 85 Configuring SSL on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server platform 86 Enabling SSL for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web logon 86 Importing Telephony Manager 3 1 Root Certificate 87 Setting up CND SSL 87 License management 89 Contents 89 Serial number and keycode 89 TN license 89 RU license 90 Client license 91 Security device dongle 91 Before configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 93 Contents 93 Overview 93 Testing the connection 94 Windows Server 2003 configuration 103 Contents 103 Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 103 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users 135 Contents 135 Overview 135 Capabilities 135 User logon and security 136 Access permissions 137 User authentication 138 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Contents 11 User groups 140 Installing and configuring desktop services 147 Configuring a modem
85. 49 Updating Apache Tomcat path Step Action 1 Go to Start gt All Programs gt Apache Tomcat 5 5 gt Configure Tomcat Select Java tab on the Apache Tomcat properties page Update Apache Tomcat path Click OK or Apply to save changes a A OO N Restart Apache Tomcat service End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 200 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Figure 107 Apache Tomcat Properties dialog Apache Tomcat Properties xi General Log On Logging Java startup shutdown T Use default Java Virtual Machine C Program Files Java jre1 5 0_02 bin client jvm dll 580 Java Classpath C Program Files Nortel Telephony Manager Tomcat bin bootstrap jar Java Options Dcatalina home C Program Files Nortel Telephony Manager Tomca Djava endorsed dirs C Program Files Nortel Telephony Manager T Djava io tmpdir C Program Files Nortel Telephony Manager Tomca Djava util logging manager org apache juli ClassLoaderLogManagel x Web server ENMS uses Apache Web server for its Web applications whereas Telephony Manager 3 1 uses Internet Information server IIS Using FaultSummary Telephony Manager 3 1 filters and then forwards system traps to ENMS Because Telephony Manager 3 1 forms the main representative agent for systems all alarms
86. 7 Overview To use Secure Sockets Layer SSL in Web applications a server certificate must be installed in Internet Information Services IIS The key storage file which contains both private and public keys and is password protected must be used for the certificate to become valid Private and public keys are used by the browser and IIS to negotiate encryption Installing a server certificate in IIS Telephony Manager 3 1 server can be configured to use SSL to protect passwords in network transport during the logon sequence For the SSL transport to become fully operational an SSL server certificate must be installed in IIS You can obtain your own server certificate from a trusted authority for example Verisign or generate your own certificate using a certificate server This document assumes you have already obtained a server certificate and only describes the steps required to install the certificate Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 86 Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL Configuring SSL on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server platform The following versions of IIS are supported on the OS platform 5 0 5 1 6 0 and 7 0 To install the certificate from the Internet Services Manager application on a Windows server complete the following procedure Procedure 9 Configuring SSL on the Tel
87. 7 06 19 134 177 222 210 Received event 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 3 3 5 0 10 enterpr Normal Wed Oct 25 17 06 29 134 177 222 210 OTM Server Status Critical gt You can also highlight a specific alarm message on the NNM Alarms Browser and right click to display the message content in a separate window See Figure 113 Alarm message content page 210 You can then analyze the different variables and their values Figure 113 Alarm message content Wed Nov 01 17 02 40 foemat in trapd cont 12 Artega Es i eta eaeoe on A penAlem ctnOperlamObiectscteDcheAndTine 0 DctetStingk private enterprises nt oim otmOpenAlam ctmOpenAlamObjects oimN ameSpace 0 E private erterprises nt otm oimDpenAlsm otmOpentlamD bects otmSite 0 8 j Oe 134 177 222 210 10 0 OctetSring 11 Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Access Procedure 53 Accessing the Telephony Manager 3 1 server from NNM Step Action 1 Highlight the Telephony Manager 3 1 object on the Network 2 Select Tools gt Web Browser gt server Home Page Figure 114 Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Access page 211 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 211 Figure 114 Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Access 134 177 222 Segment Map Edit View Performance Configuration Fault A a Your default Web brows
88. 9 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning Copyright 2003 2008 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Publication _NN43050 300 Document status Standard Document version 01 07 Document date 3 June 2009 To provide feedback or report a problem in this document go to www nortel com documentfeedback The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Nortel the Nortel Logo the Globemark SL 1 Meridian 1 and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners NORTEL
89. 9 Procedure 20 Procedure 21 Procedure Procedure 22 Procedure 23 Procedure 24 Procedure 25 Procedure 26 Procedure 27 Procedure 28 Procedure 29 Procedure 30 Procedure 31 Procedure 32 Enabling parent paths 107 Configuring IIS 5 0 isolation mode 109 Adjusting Internet Explorer security settings 110 Disable Terminal Services on the Telephony Manager Server 112 Configuring client authentication on the server side 114 Configuring security for Telephony Manager 3 1 118 Configuring authentication 139 Configuring telephone access options 144 Configuring the Telephone Keys page 145 Configuring the Telephone Features page 147 Installing and Configuring Desktop Services 147 Changing the factory INIT string 150 Verifying that the modem is properly configured 151 151 152 Testing the COM port Verifying the COM port Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 14 Contents Procedure 33 Procedure 34 Procedure 35 Procedure 36 Procedure 37 Procedure 38 Procedure 39 Procedure 40 Procedure 41 Procedure 42 Procedure 43 Procedure 44 Procedure 45 Procedure 46 Procedure 47 Procedure 48 Procedure 49 Procedure 50 Procedure 51 Procedure 52 Procedure 53 Procedure 54 Procedure 55 Procedure 56 Procedure 57 Procedure 58 Procedure 59 Procedure 60 Procedure 61 Procedure 62 Procedure
90. AP IP Address 0 0 0 0 For a Serial connection type see Figure 44 System Properties dialog box Communications tab Serial Profile page 97 g Enter all modem parameters and dial up information h Select the appropriate value in the Modem Script text box This is commonly None unless a specific value is defined for your system i Click Apply Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Testing the connection 97 Figure 44 System Properties dialog box Communications tab Serial Profile Sample Site Sample Meridian 1 System Properties End Setting up customer information Procedure 14 Setting up customer information Step Action 1 Click Customers tab See Figure 45 System Properties dialog box Customers tab page 98 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 98 Before configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Figure 45 System Properties dialog box Customers tab Sample Site Sample System System Properties Customer0 Customer1 customer2 customer3 customer4 A new customer may have to be added before Properties can be clicked To add a new customer click Add 2 Click Properties The
91. All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE This product includes the following software The Purdue Compiler Construction Tool Set written by Russell Quong June 30 1995 Adapted by Terence Parr to ANTLR stuff Parr Research Corporation with Purdue University and AHPCRC University of Minnesota 1989 1995 SNMP Development Kit written by James R Davin Advanced Network Architecture group M I T Laboratory for Computer Science 45 Technology Square Cambridge MA 02139 Copyright 1988 1989 Massachusetts Institute of Technology Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documenta
92. Application Details Execution Environments Supported Resources NT Environment jo Opty Station 2 fizeni C Class CmdLine FauttSummary bat N Name PFN PFN End Node l Enterprise Server UNIX Environment Probe VLAN f Class CmdLine aultSummary N Name PFN PFN l Black Box All Browser Environment AliButNoSel 2 folder Class URL lex URL_WITH_HOSTNAME_AND_PROTOCOL F 3 ManagementServer e Kil Mnemonic F Resource Limit fi C o amw Resa cancer Hep Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 202 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Procedure 51 Launching FaultSummary Step Action 1 Select the Telephony Manager 3 1 icon and use the right click menu to launch FaultSummary See Figure 109 Launch FaultSummary page 202 Figure 109 Launch FaultSummary i an p End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Removing a Telephony Manager 3 1 server 203 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 CAUTION Service Interruption Telephony Manager 3 1 is included in the device file to monitor the alarms received from the Telephony Manager 3 1 server When Telephony Manager 3 1 cores
93. Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Component Services Click Computers folder Right click on My Computer Select Properties Select Default Properties tab Place a check next to Enable Distributed COM on this computer Click OK and close the Component Services window oN O A A WO N Reboot the machine for the changes to take effect End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 74 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Performing a keycode upgrade Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Keycode upgrade page 75 Keycode upgrade For keycode upgrades that do not involve applications a separate license upgrade utility is incorporated into the Telephony Manager Navigator under the Utilities menu Procedure 6 Upgrading the keycode Step Action 1 From the Utilities menu in Telephony Manager Navigator select Keycode Upgrade SeeFigure 35 Keycode upgrade Utilities menu page 76 The menu items shown in Figure 35 Keycode upgrade Utilities menu page 76 are not available for a Client installation of Telephony Manager 3 1 Nortel Communication Server 10
94. Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Overview Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Subject page 23 Applicable systems page 24 Intended audience page 25 Conventions page 25 Subject This document is up issued to incorporate information in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Feature Specification document Telephony Manager 3 1 TM 3 1 is designed for managers of telecommunications equipment and authorized Nortel distributors Telephony Manager 3 1 provides a single point of access for management of Nortel systems Telephony Manager 3 1 uses internet protocol IP technology to target e single point of connectivity to systems and related devices data collection for traffic and billing records e collection processing distribution and notification for alarms and events e data entry and propagation employee names and telephone numbers shared in multiple databases Windows and Web based management applications Note about legacy products and releases This NTP contains information about systems components and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication server 1000 Release 4 0 software Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 24 Overview For more information about legacy products and releases click the Technical Documentation
95. Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Using ENMS InfoCenter 193 c Select Telephony Manager See Figure 104 InfoCenter Voice Management Properties dialog box page 194 d Click Apply End The wizards provided in ENMS 9 0 1 and later add new Telephony Manager 3 1 servers to ENMS These wizards automatically establish the Device Agent Interface relationship in ENMS databases Figure 103 InfoCenter Resources aoe eenk H Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 194 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Figure 104 InfoCenter Voice Management Properties dialog box Search Presentation Details Scope Filter DY Al Types osoensis Advanced C Z Switch Gsi f 2 Hub 2 Unk Status x Switch Community Name f Bridge Cioud D lt j Subnet Interface amp C Seed S L Router S TJ Bridge Wide Area Network ELAN amp Z Cable Modem SY ManagementServer e S Segment Opti Station Agent End Node Enterprise Server Probe VLAN Biack Box Apply Reset Cancel Help Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 server object to ENMS InfoCenter Add a Telephony Manager 3 1 server resource for every Telephony Manager 3 1 server that you integrate and monitor with ENMS If Access Control is enabled you must hav
96. E ie a SAN alain demas NON SO IRAS Q correct Y 1f appbed to the selected server this security policy would use the following inbound port configuration Open Open 67 DHCP Server Open 60 HTTP To Open 123 NTP uoe Open 135 RPC endpoint mapper DCOM To Open 137 NetBIOS name service uoP Open 137 NetBIOS name service A To change any of the above settings go back to the previous pages and change the appropriate Learn more about confirming port configuration CEE me cees 14 Click Next The Registry Settings window appears see Figure 82 Registry settings page 129 Place a check mark in the Skip this section check box Figure 82 Registry settings Security Configuration Wizard Registry Settings Use this section to configure protocols used to communicate with other computers When configured to communicate with computers running earlier versions of Windows these protocols are vulnerable to exploits such as password cracking and man in the middle attacks A Answering these questions incorrectly might prevent computers running earlier versions of Windows from communicating with the selected server If you do not know the characteristics of the computers that are communicating with the selected server you should skip this section 1 ip this section this security policy wil not configure registry Learn more about registry settings lt exk e cancel
97. Enables the Active Server Pages and Server Side Includes Web Service Extensions e Enables the parent paths Enables the www service to run in IIS 5 0 Isolation mode ConfigureWin2003SA vbs does not automate the following tasks Does not add the http localhost admin site to the Trusted Sites This has to be configured for every user e Does not modify the COM Security Settings e Does not change the Access Permissions for the shared Telephony Manager folder When to run the ConfigureWin2003SA vbs This script has to be manually run by the user after the installation of Telephony Manager 3 1 completes successfully How to run the ConfigureWin2003SA vbs The user can launch this script by double clicking the file or using the following command gt cscript lt path ConfigureWin2003SA vbs The following sections describe the steps to perform the configurations manually Of these the configurations that are automated using the script are indicated Web Server extensions Web server extensions are automated using the script By default IIS serves only static content ASP ASP NET WebDAV publishing FrontPage Server Extensions and Common Gateway Interfaces must be enabled after installing IIS If not IIS returns a generic 404 custom error page to prevent disclosure of configuration information To permit IIS to serve dynamic content the administrator must unlock this content in the Web service extensions node in IIS
98. GB 1 GB plus 500 MB Space May increase customer data storage customer data storage depending on number of telephones Custom Help Web Help all 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 400 MB 400 MB 400 MB languages excluding custom help SVGA Color Monitor 1024x768 or higher 1024x768 or higher 1024x768 or higher and interface card resolution resolution resolution Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements 35 3 1 2 inch 1 44 MB floppy disk drive CD ROM drive Ethernet Network Interface Card See Note 2 Hayes compatible modem is optional for connection to remote sites required for polling configurations Please note WinModems are incompatible and are not supported PC com port with 16550 UART is required USB serial adapters and USB modems are not supported PC COM port with 16550 UART See Note 3 Parallel Port Dongle or USB dongle Parallel printer port configured or USB port required for dongle Two button Windows compatible mouse or positioning Required Required 1 or2 56K BPS recommende d Required Required Required Supports one USB dongle only USB dongles are not supported through a USB hub Required Required Required Required 1 56K BPS recommende d Required Required Requ
99. ITG IP Telecommuter ReadOnly ITG M1 IP Trk ReadOnly 9 C Web ReadWrite C Equipment ReadWrite 4 Web Station ReadWvrite Telecom Billing Reports ReadWrite CI Web Administration ReadWrite CiSites C Sample Site 9 E Toronto Q CI Option 11C Cf Windows No Access C web DECT TBSWEB Web Alarm Mgmt Web Common Services Web Maint Windows Web Station Admin Telephone Profile data retrieved OK Cancel Apply Help lava Applet Window The Access Right column lists the level of access allowed for each site system and application This is the same tree structure and performs the same function as the Windows based New User Group Properties dialog box The question mark indicates that the sub items belonging to the item displaying the question mark have mixed access settings To modify access rights Step Action 1 Use the drop down list to select ReadWrite ReadOnly or No Access for each item in the tree 2 Click Apply End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 144 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users Telephone access The Telephone tab in the User Group Properties dialog box is used to control access to the telephone pages on the Web for each user group See Figure 92 Telephone access properties dialog box Keys tab page 145 The options that are conf
100. June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Logon process 163 There are two different types of Navigator users e Local Local Navigator users have accounts that exist on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server When a user is added an Telephony Manager 3 1 user account and a corresponding local Windows user account are created on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The new user is assigned to the selected Windows user group Delete an Telephony Manager 3 1 user account to remove the user account from the account list as well as from all relevant database tables Remote Remote Navigator users have accounts that reside on a domain controller or in a CND Directory Telephony Manager 3 1 User administration is used to assign the Remote Navigator user s logon name to an Telephony Manager 3 1 user group For information about configuring Navigator users see Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator users page 167 End users End users access the Telephony Manager 3 1 Desktop Services Web site to view information about and make changes to their telephones Although end users can be given a Telephony Manager 3 1 user account similar to Navigator users the only supported authentication method for end users is CND authentication For end users the following attributes are entered into the users record in the CND Directory logon name When configuring CND authentication the logon name may be one of the following
101. M port has been located go back to Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator and bring up the properties for the system to which you are trying to connect 3 Click Communication tab and then choose PPP or Serial from the communication profile list 4 Verify that the COM port selected for this profile is the COM port on which the modem was located using HyperTerminal 5 Verify that the baud rate matches the settings for the system port that is dialed End Step Action If the modem still does not dial 1 Follow the steps in the procedure Procedure 31 Testing the COM port page 151 to establish a HyperTerminal connection Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Troubleshooting modem connections 153 2 After issuing the AT command and receiving the OK prompt issue the command ATDT 1234567 where 1234567 is the telephone number for the modem connected to the system 3 Listen to determine whether the modem dials and connects a If unable to hear the modem dialing and connecting at this point verify that the telephone line and modem cables are connected correctly b If the modem dials and connects verify that dial up networking is installed along with a dial up adapter End Scripting fails In this scenario the modem dials and connects but the Connection Details button reveals th
102. Manager 3 1 list the versions of IIS supported on the OS platform and add attention information to Remote Desktop and Terminal Server July 2007 Standard 01 05 This document is up issued to add added attention information to procedure for adding a user June 2007 Standard 01 04 This document is up issued update information in Converting Systems in Telephony Manager and ELAN subnet information in Appendix A Typical configurations June 2007 Standard 01 03 This document is up issued edit information in Configuring security for Telephony Manager 3 1 June 2007 Standard 01 02 This document is up issued updated information in Configuring security for Telephony Manager 3 1 May 2007 Standard 01 01 This document is up issued to support Nortel Communication Server Release 5 0 July 2006 Standard 5 00 This document is up issued from Telephony Manager 3 0 to Telephony Manager 3 1 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 8 Revision History March 2006 Standard 4 00 This document is up issued to support Telephony Manager 3 0 August 2005 Standard 3 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 September 2004 Standard 2 00 This document is up issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 4 0 October 2003 Standard 1 00 This document is a new NTP for
103. Manager to function Installing the client software Procedure 4 Installing the client software Step Action 1 Before installation a On client PC exit all Windows programs b Ensure Distributed COM is enabled For DCOM to work the Telephony Manager 3 1 client must be able to reach the Telephony Manager 3 1 server by its actual IP address If Network Address Translation NAT is used on the server the Telephony Manager 3 1 client is not able to reach the server i From Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Component Services right click My Computer under the Computers folder of the Console tree ii Click on Properties gt Default Properties ensuring the Enable Distributed COM on this computer check box is selected c On the Telephony Manager 3 1 server grant users full control permissions to the shared directory lt tmroot gt Telephony Manager d On the client PC map the shared directory located on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server Ensure that the mapped drive is available upon reboot of the client PC Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing the client software 65 2 Double click Setup exe on the Telephony Manager 3 1 CD ROM Figure 22 InstallShield Wizard Preparing to Install page 65 appears Figure 22 InstallShield Wizard Preparing to Install Nor
104. Maximum number of systems 256 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 270 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Parameter Maximum Value Organizational Hierarchy Maximum number of organizational levels Virtual Terminals Maximum number of Virtual Terminals that can be enabled at one time Billing applications TBS CCCR CRS and GCAS Maximum number of call records per costing configuration in TBS 2 500 000 Maximum number of call records for CCCR across all systems 5 000 000 Maximum number of call records for GCAS 4 000 000 Maximum number of call records for CRS TBS amp GCAS combined 2 500 000 Maximum number of managed systems for TBS Billing General and 10 TBS Billing Enhanced TBS CCCR CRS and GCAS Maximum number of lines in a PBX for TBS Billing General and TBS 3 500 Billing Enhanced TBS CCCR CRS and GCAS Maximum number of Consolidated Multi site Reports for TBS Billing General Maximum number of Consolidated Multi site Reports for TBS Billing Enhanced TBS CCCR CRS and GCAS CCCR operates only within a single Telephony Manager server and can only be run on a Telephony Manager server or standalone system Alarm Management Maximum number of traps in the circular queue 1 360 Rate of alarm production A single system produces alarms on average a
105. Name ShareName Specifies the name of the server or its IP address and the shared resource If ComputerName contains spaces use quotation marks around the entire computer name from the double backslash to the end of the computer name for example ComputerName ShareName e savecred Stores the provided credentials for reuse e Password Specifies the password needed to access the shared resource Type an asterisk to produce a prompt for the password The password is not displayed when typed in at the password prompt e user Specifies a different user name with which the connection is made e DomainName Specifies another domain If you omit DomainName net use uses the current logged on domain e UserName Specifies the user name with which to log on Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 64 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software Figure 21 Mapped drive from command line window c C WINNT system32 cmd exe 192 168 261 31 Nortel savecred 10v connected to 192 168 261 31 Nortel conmand completed successfully gt Nonet use connections will be renmenbered Network 261 31 Nortel Microsoft Windows Network 58 55 181N1PC Microsoft Windows Network conmand completed succe illy The initially mapped drive is the drive that must always be mapped for Telephony
106. Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 software requirements 41 Table 8 Meridian 1 X11 system software release and packages Alarm Management Additional packages for Alarm Notification Maintenance Windows System Terminal Overlay Passthru SNMP Alarms Open Alarms Data Buffering and Access Ethernet Data Buffering and Access Serial Database Disaster Recovery Virtual Terminal server Emergency Service for Client Mobility Pkg 164 242 243 and 296 Pkg 55 and 315 Pkg 164 242 243 and 296 Pkg 164 242 and 296 Ethernet connection for Station Administration Traffic Pkg 164 242 and 296 Analysis and ESN ART Pkg 315 Pkg 351 N A Pkg 164 242 296 and 351 Pkg 164 242 and 296 Pkg 336 and 337 Table 9 CS 1000 and Meridian 1 software requirements page 41 lists CS 1000 and Meridian 1 software requirements Table 9 CS 1000 and Meridian 1 software requirements Alarm Management System Terminal ESN Art Traffic Analysis Telecom Billing System TBS Call Tracking Web Alarm Viewing Virtual Terminal server Maintenance Pages Inventory Telephone Manager List Manager Access server DECT Ethernet PPP Ethernet PPP Ethernet PPP Serial Ethernet Serial2 Serial Ethernet DBA Serial Ethernet PPP Ethernet Serials Ethernet PPP Ethernet Serial Ethernet PPP Serial Ethernet PPP 1 Ethernet and PPP connections require the MAT Management Interface software package 296 For version 4 5 and be
107. OURCES ALL SOURCES ALL SOURCES ALL SOURCES There are six events defined for the otmOpenAlarmEp Enterprise For each event you configure the desired actions to be taken if the event occurs Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 215 Use the Telephony Manager 3 1 Major Alarm event otmOpenAlarmMajor Specific 2 as an example 3 Double click the corresponding entry on the list The Modify Events dialog box appears See Figure 120 Modify Events Description page 215 Figure 120 Modify Events Description Modify Events otmOpendlarmM ajor The OTM Open Alarm Trap with a severity hence it contains no natural language text 4 Select the Event Message tab See Figure 121 Modify Events Event Message page 216 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 216 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Figure 121 Modify Events Event Message Modify Events 2S tatus Alarms 5 Configure the following a Actions Select Log and display in category Status Alarms This enables the display of the incoming event message in the NNM Alarm Browser b Severity Select Major for th
108. Removing a Telephony Manager 3 1 server page 203 Troubleshooting page 204 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 188 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Overview Telephony Manager 3 1 integrates with ONMS versions 10 1 and 10 2 and ENMS version 10 4 ENMS is an enterprise level network management solution providing fault performance configuration and security management for Nortel inter networking devices Through ENMS you can monitor your Telephony Manager 3 1 servers Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm Manager receives SNMP traps from managed CS 1000 and Meridian 1 entities Through Alarm Notification Telephony Manager 3 1 sends filtered traps to ENMS By using ENMS InfoCenter you can manually add Telephony Manager 3 1 servers into the Telephony Managers Resources folder Property information that you add about the Telephony Manager 3 1 servers is added to the ENMS database For access to ENMS documentation in your Web browser go to www nortel comand follow the appropriate links InfoCenter graphically identifies when a device is in an alarm state By using Optivity InfoCenter you can set the color for alarm levels When a device is in an alarm state you can right click it to open an ENMS fault management application For instance you can start Fault Summary that graphically lists
109. Succession 3 1 It was created to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document now retired Using Optivity Telephony Manager 553 300 1 330 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Contents How to get help 17 New in this release 19 New in Telephony Manager 3 1 19 Related information 19 NTPs 19 Online 22 CD ROM 22 Overview 23 Contents 23 Subject 23 Note about legacy products and releases 23 Applicable systems 24 System migration 24 Intended audience 25 Conventions 25 Terminology 25 Text 26 Acronyms 27 Preparing for installation 29 Contents 29 Overview 29 Telephony Manager 3 1 installation tasks 30 Supported systems 30 Supported upgrade paths 32 Telephony Manager 3 1 server and clients overview 32 Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements 33 Telephony Manager 3 1 software requirements 36 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software 43 Contents 43 Overview 43 Installation program features 44 Checking local security settings 44 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 10 Contents Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software
110. Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 303 Appendix TBS to CND file header conversion The following table provides sample information for CVS Subscriber Import utilizing the TBS file header to CND file header conversion See Migrating employee data page 81 for further information regarding migrating employee data Table 19 TBS file header to CND file header conversion TBS File Header CND File Header UserlD or EmpFNameEmpLName cn EmpFName givenName EmpMName initials EmpLName sn blank field employeeNumber Abbr1 Abbr2 Abbr3 Abbr20 departmentNumber JobTitle title Email mail Address street City ProvState st Postal postalCode Country country DisplayNameAttribute cpndName UserGroupAttribute tmUserGroup WebReportingAccessRightsAttribute billingWebReportingAccessRights AccountCodeAsset_ billingAccountCode AuthorizationCodeAsset_ billingAuthorizationCode Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 304 Appendix TBS to CND file header conversion ExtensionAsset_ preferredDirectoryNumber PhoneNumberAsset_ preferredExternalT elephoneNumber StationLocationAsset_ officeLocation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard
111. Terminal server The Terminal server application is a Windows application that uses the Telephony Manager 3 1 database to obtain site system and IP address information The Terminal server supports direct serial connections and system overlay connection over an IP network If connecting over an IP network to a system the port user types SCH MTC BUG TRF can be configured Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 180 Setting up the CND server and Terminal server Telephony Manager 3 1 does not support Remote Desktop with Terminal Server Terminal server setup To launch the Terminal server application from the Start menu select Programs gt Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager gt Terminal server The Terminal server dialog box appears See Figure 99 Terminal server dialog box page 180 Figure 99 Terminal server dialog box B Terminal Server BEI m Configured Systems Hide Sample Site Meridian Mail 0 stems Sample Site NCE 47 114 45 109 0 Sems Sample Site Sample System 0 Terminals Testing CPP 134 177 222 155 0 Testing Nce 47 114 45 109 0 Testing Opt 11C 134 177 222 240 Help Testing SC9 47 114 45 m Terminal Client s on Testing SC9 47 114 45 3 From Dwain eren ATTENTION Click Hide on Terminal server dialog
112. Uninstall radio button from the Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard as shown in Figure 138 Telephony Manager InstallShield wizard page 238 If any clients are associated with the server prior to uninstallation a confirmation message displays as seen in Figure 140 Telephony Manager Server uninstall confirmation with clients page 239 Figure 140 Telephony Manager Server uninstall confirmation with clients Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallSheild Wizard es Please note that 2 clients are associated with this server Continuing this uninstallation will cause client Functionality to Fail Click Yes to continue uninstallation and No to exit the setup as a fa 2 Click Yes to continue the Telephony Manager Server uninstallation 3 Click No to cancel the uninstallation End When clients are associated with the server uninstallation of the server creates problems in the functionality of the client In this case the functionality of the Telephony Manager Client fails Procedure 64 Uninstalling Telephony Manager Client if able to access Common Data path of Telephony Manager Server Step Action 1 Select the Uninstall radio button from the Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard as shown in Figure 138 Telephony Manager InstallShield wizard page 238 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 20
113. User Rights Assignment 43 9 Security Options RE Allow log on locally IUSR_WHITEHORS i a Public Key Policies Bee Allow log on locally Properties 21x Software Restriction Policies EA ji IP Security Policies on Local Computer Biche Local Security Setting 3 Che icre z Allow log on locally no Loa eo Add User or Group Remove ou IE i End If the computer is within a domain the policy settings of the domain can override the local security policies The following are possible workarounds so the user can install PostgreSQL If these solutions do not work it is possible the problem may be specific to the particular domain and Nortel recommends that you contact your domain administrator Procedure 2 Workarounds for installation of PostgreSQL Step Action 1 Log off the domain 2 Log on to the PC as the local administrator 3 Check the policies prior to installing Telephony Manager Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software 47 4 Move the PC out of the domain 5 Check the policies prior to installing Telephony Manager 6 Move the PC back into the domain End Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software The following procedure will install the
114. about different network configurations that are possible with Telephony Manager 3 1 Procedure 71 Configuring TCP IP settings on a Windows server Step Action 1 Choose Start gt Settings gt Network and Dialup Connections Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 248 Windows 2000 Server reference 2 In the Network and Dialup Connections dialog box right click the Local Area Connection icon and then select Properties 3 In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box click to select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box appears See Figure 145 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box page 248 ATTENTION Ensure that the DHCP IP address is a static address as the host name and IP address are used for client licensing If the client s IP address changes the client is not able to log on until the licence file is adjusted Figure 145 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 2 x General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings C Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address Sub
115. agement Figure 97 New User Group Properties dialog box General Set the user s read write read only or access denied status for applications by clicking on the tree Note that some applications do no support read only mode For these applications read only will be treated as access denied Name UserGroup Number in Use Last Changed B Root EF Navigator l E windows ER Web Sites Sample Site Meridian Mail B Sample CSE H Sample Media Gateway EY Sample System E A Toronto xl I Administrator E Access to Selected System System Option ME UserID Rassword 3 Enter a name for this User Group For each site system and application in the tree use the right mouse button to assign user privileges Read write Read only or No Access Each click of the right mouse button causes the access privileges and corresponding icon to change Select the Administrator box if appropriate The site and system icons change to reflect the access level Access privileges defined for sites or systems at higher levels in the tree structure are applied to all subordinate items Table 11 Access privilege icons page 173 The question mark icon indicates that the sub items belonging to the item displaying the question mark icon have mixed access settings Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Comm
116. allation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Overview 297 Contents 13 Installation requirements 297 Programming the switch 298 PC server installation requirements 298 Appendix C Configuring a USB modem 299 Contents 299 Overview 299 Checking for a virtual COM port 299 Changing the virtual COM port to USB modem association 300 TBS to CND file header conversion 303 Index 305 Procedures Procedure 1 Checking local security settings 45 Procedure 2 Workarounds for installation of PostgreSQL 46 Procedure 3 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software 47 Procedure 4 Installing the client software 64 Procedure 5 Re enabling the DCOM service 73 Procedure 6 Upgrading the keycode 75 Procedure 7 Operating system migration 81 Procedure 8 Creating the employee csv file 82 Procedure 9 Configuring SSL on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server platform 86 Procedure 10 Enabling SSL for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web logon 86 Procedure 11 Importing Telephony Manager 3 1 Root Certificate 87 Procedure 12 Setting up CND SSL 87 Procedure 13 Setting up communications information 94 Procedure 14 Setting up customer information 97 Procedure 15 Setting up Telephony Manager 3 1 applications 99 Procedure 16 Setting up system data 101 Procedure 17 Enabling Web Service extensions in IIS 6 0 105 Procedure 18 Adding a New ISAPI Web Service extension to IIS 6 0 106 Procedure 1
117. anagement Default v Call Tracking serial v Consolidated Reports System v DECT Default v ESN Default v Gen Cost Alle Sys v Maintenance Windows Default v Station Admin CPND List Manager Default v System Terminal Overlay Passthru Default v System Terminal T220 Default v Telecom Billing System v Traffic Default m Selected Application IV Enabled Enable All Name Alarm Management Disable All Communication Profile Profile Type Default bd Ethemet Cancel Apply Help By default each application is selected Modify these selections by deselecting applications Choose one the following a Enable All Enables the default communication profile for all available applications under the Application tab with the exception of Call Tracking which is always serial If there is no serial profile added then Call Tracking is not enabled If the user has added any serial profile then the first profile is set as the communication profile The General Cost Allocation System and Telecom Billing System applications are enabled without a communication profile b Disable All Disables the communication profile for all available applications under the Application tab Click OK End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Testing the connection 101 Setting up system data
118. and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 116 Windows Server 2003 configuration Figure 60 Launch Permission Security Limits Group or user names Administrators BROBIN R18 Administrators ANONYMOUS LOGON Distributed COM Users BROBIN R18 Distributed COM Us f Everyone Intarmat Buast Anca RRORIMPASINICR RRM b Add Remove Permissions for ANONYMOUS LOGON Allow Deny Local Launch Remote Launch Local ctivation Remote Activation Hae oooo End Data Execution Prevention Settings Data Execution Prevention DEP settings can cause applications within Telephony Manager to not execute therefore you must ensure that DEP settings are appropriately set DEP is controlled through parameters in the BOOT ini file which can be set in the System dialog box in Control Panel By default the parameter is OptIn which enables DEP only for system binaries and applications that opt in An OptOut parameter enables DEP for all processes If DEP is not to be applied to a particular process that process should be manually added to the exception list For details refer to www support microsoft com The following figures detail the two ways by which the changes can be effected Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nor
119. and software comparisons Table 13 Hardware Machine Type with CS 1000 Release 5 0 page 259 shows a list of machine types for Meridian 1 with CS 1000 Release 5 0 Table 13 Hardware Machine Type with CS 1000 Release 5 0 11C Mini 51C 060 51C 060E 61C 060E 61C 060E 61C PII 61C CPPIV 81 81C 060 81 81C 060E 81C PII 81C CPPIV When Signaling server check box in Network page is cleared Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 Meridian1 110 11C Mini 51C 060 51C 060E 61C 060 61C 060E 61C PII 61C CPPIV 81 81C 060 81 81C 060E 81C PII 81C CPPIV When Signaling server check box in Network page is selected Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 Communication server 1000 CS 1000S Small System CS 1000M Half Group 060 CS 1000M Half Group 060E CS 1000M Single Group 060 CS 1000M Single Group 060E CS 1000M Single Group PII CS 1000M Single Group CPPIV CS 1000M E Multi Group 060 CS 1000M E Multi Group 060E CS 1000M E Multi Group PII CS 1000M E Multi Group CPPIV Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Mana
120. andard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Starting Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications 197 Modifying Telephony Manager 3 1 server object properties Procedure 48 Modifying Telephony Manager 3 1 server Object Properties Step Action 1 In InfoCenter open a folder in the Folders pane 2 Select the Telephony Manager 3 1 server that you added 3 From the InfoCenter menu bar select File gt Properties The Object Properties dialog box appears displaying the properties for the selected network object 4 Edit the object properties that you want Click OK End Starting Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Application links are integrated with ENMS when a Telephony Manager 3 1 server is added The Telephony Manager 3 1 system accessed can be connected remotely through the network You can start Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications by choosing Configuration and selecting Telephony Manager from the shortcut menu on the Telephony Manager 3 1 icon in Enterprise NMS InfoCenter See Figure 106 Starting Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications page 198 This action launches the default Web browser for your system and connects to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server See Java Runtime Environment for Telephony Manager 3 1 and Enterprise NMS page 198 for details on JRE Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300
121. ard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 12 Contents Removing a Telephony Manager 3 1 server 203 Troubleshooting 204 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView 207 Contents 207 Overview 207 Limitations 208 Hardware and software requirements 208 System integration 209 Installation and configuration 211 Converting Systems in Telephony Manager 231 Contents 231 Overview 231 Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 235 Contents 235 Overview 235 Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 235 Uninstallation of Telephony Manager Client or Telephony Manager Server 237 Windows 2000 Server reference 243 Contents 243 Overview 243 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 on Windows 2000 Server 243 Installing Network Adapter software 246 Testing network cards 253 Setting up Metabase Editor utility 255 Contents 255 Overview 255 Setting up the Metabase Editor utility 255 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines 257 Contents 257 Overview 257 Capacity factors 258 Hardware and software comparisons 259 Software limits 260 IIS support on the Telephony Manager server 273 PC hardware 274 Network bandwidth 277 Telephony Manager 3 1 system performance 285 Telephony Manager 3 1 port usage 291 Telephony Manager 3 1 language support 294 FTP Server configuration 295 Appendix B Installation checklist 297 Contents 297 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Inst
122. are Input Output Administration NN4300 1 611 Describes the meaning of system messages e Software Input Output Maintenance NN43001 711 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Related information 21 Describes the prompts and responses for a system s command line interface CLI This guide includes information about overlay programs that are classified as maintenance overlays e Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration NN43021 310 Provides information about the Survivable IP Expansion SIPE feature for a Meridian 1 Large System e Communication Server 1000S Installation and Configuration NN4303 1 310 Provides information about the Survivable IP Expansion SIPE feature for CS 1000S systems e Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 3001 160 Provides information for Data Networking about Communication server 1000 and Meridian 1 systems e Security Management NN43001 604 Provides information about the OAM Security Phases and II e SRG Configuration Guide Survivable Remote Gateway SRG software version 1 0 P0609195 Provides information on how to setup and configure a Survivable Remote Gateway SRG system for an IP network e Main office configuration guide for Survivable Remote Gateway 50 NN43001 307 Describes the Main O
123. arning window appears See Figure 38 TN license warning page 90 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 90 License management Figure 38 TN license warning i Your TN license 10016 is nearly exceeded Please contact your vendor to get more license License exceeded If your TN license is exceeded an Error window appears See Figure 39 TN license error page 90 This message appears every 15 minutes Contact your vendor to obtain a license for additional TNs Figure 39 TN license error x Your TN license 10016 is exceeded Please contact your vendor to get more license License reuse TN checking is performed on bootup and after every 12 hours of operation If you delete a site the TN licenses associated with that site becomes available for reuse after the next TN check If you are unable to wait for the next TN check you can reboot the Telephony Manager 3 1 server RU license Reporting Units RUs are the base used for licensing the telemanagement applications in Telephony Manager 3 1 An RU represents a single entity in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Corporate databases to which costs usage can be assigned and reported on through the telemanagement applications An entity can be either an employee in the Employee database an external party in the External Parties database or a r
124. at scripting failed while waiting for a prompt In the Communications profile verify that the baud rate configured for the TTY on the switch matches the baud rate configured for the modem in the PPP or Serial Communications profiles for the system to which you wish to connect Make sure that the data bits stop bits and parity match as well Procedure 33 Viewing the Communications profiles Step Action To view the Communications profiles for a system 1 Right click on the desired system in the Navigator window 2 Select Properties and then click Communications tab in the Properties dialog box End Modem dials but does not connect Procedure 34 Verifying the modem connection Step Action 1 Verify that the dialed telephone number is not busy Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 154 Configuring a modem for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications 2 Verify that all necessary digits in the telephone number have been included 3 Check the PPP or Serial Communications profiles for the system to which you wish to connect To view the Communications profiles for a system a Right click on the desired system in the Navigator window b Select Properties and then click Communications tab in the Properties dialog box End Session fails In this scenario the modem dials and con
125. atically The utility can be found at the following location lt tmroot gt Common Services Program Files MigrationController exe Windows client migration Because all common data resides on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server backup and restore of data on the client is not required If the Telephony Manager 3 1 server is successfully installed Telephony Manager 3 1 clients can be installed on any new supported operating system Migrating employee data ATTENTION CND 2 1 is a mandatory requirement to ensure the proper functioning of Telephony Manager 3 1 It is not part of Telephony Manager install and must be installed separately For detailed information about installing and synchronizing the CND see Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 and Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 82 Performing migrations The Database Migration Utility does not migrate employee data in the Employee Directory There are 2 possible ways to recreate the employee data in Telephony Manager 3 1 e Use the CND Sync Utility provided by Telephony Manager 3 1 to automatically add employee records in CND based on CPND name of the telephones e Use the Subscriber Import feature provided by the CND Manager to add employee records u
126. ation scenarios Standalone Telephony Manager 3 1 server This is the simplest configuration consisting of an Telephony Manager 3 1 server with no Telephony Manager 3 1 clients There may be optional Web clients There are two possible setups e The server has the Dual NIC configuration with a dedicated ELAN subnet network interface Generally only a standalone Telephony Manager 3 1 server that is managing a single system is set up with an ELAN Network interface Figure 150 Standalone Telephony Manager 3 1 server with Dual NIC configuration page 281 illustrates this configuration e Routed connections are used from the Telephony Manager 3 1 server to the ELAN subnets of managed systems through the Nortel server subnet This configuration is preferred over the Dual NIC configuration Figure 151 Standalone Telephony Manager 3 1 server with routed connections page 282 illustrates this configuration Figure 150 Standalone Telephony Manager 3 1 server with Dual NIC configuration TLAN Subnet 4 Nortel Networks Server Subnet Router Layer Three Switch G Other Subnet s NMS LDAP server me Subnet Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 282 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Figure 151 Standalone Telephony Manager 3 1 server
127. auses the server to prefer the Nortel server Subnet network interface for multicast traffic rather than the ELAN network interface The binding order of the network interfaces is also important the Nortel server Subnet network interface is first in the binding order Network services not used on the ELAN subnet are disabled as well Procedure 72 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Dual Network Interface Step Action 1 Right click on My Network Places and select Properties 2 Right click on the ELAN network interface card and select Properties Ensure that the Client for Microsoft Networks and File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check boxes are selected If not then clear and save the changes 3 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties The IP Address and Subnet mask is set The Default gateway field must be left empty to avoid transmission of unintentional traffic on the ELAN subnet 4 Click Advanced The Advanced TCP IP Settings dialog box appears See Figure 146 Advanced TCP IP Settings dialog box page 250 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 250 Windows 2000 Server reference Figure 146 Advanced TCP IP Settings dialog box zix IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask 192 168 168 2 255 255 255 0 Add Ed
128. be the domain name server DNS representation of the IP address if the IP address can be resolved locally Use the command nslookup to retrieve the DNS representation if you do not already know it See Figure 131 nslookup command page 226 If the IP address cannot be interpreted locally then enter the dotted decimal representation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 226 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Figure 131 nslookup command amp Command Prompt OF x Microsoft R gt Windows NIT lt TM gt lt C gt Copyright 1985 1996 Microsoft Corp 22 127 ortel com 5 engwest baynetworks com 7 222 127 10 If you want to indicate the status of the Telephony Manager 3 1 server through the color of the object on the map be sure to set the Status Source under Symbol Properties to Object See Figure 132 NNM Main Menu Symbol Properties page 226 and Figure 133 Symbol Properties dialog box page 227 Figure 132 NNM Main Menu Symbol Properties 134 177 222 Segment1 Oy x Map Edit View Performance Configuration Fault Tools Options Window Help Symbol OTM 127 Open Change Symbol Type Symbol Properties OTM 210 default Read Write Auto Layout X Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installat
129. ble Terminal Services on the Telephony Manager Sever using the procedure Disable Terminal Services on the Telephony Manager Server page 112 Disable Terminal Services on the Telephony Manager Server Step Action 1 Go to Settings Control Panel Add remove Programs 2 Select Add remove Windows components 3 From the list populated find the Terminal Services option If it is checked clear the checkbox 4 Exit Add remove Windows components 5 Go to Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Services a Right click on Terminal Services and select Properties b Change the startup type to Disabled c Click Apply 6 Exit Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Services 7 Reboot the Telephony Manager Sever Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 113 End Telephony Manager 3 1 server client setup For a Telephony Manager 3 1 server client setup the Telephony Manager 3 1 root directory on the server must be given shared access In Windows Server 2003 a shared directory is granted Read only permission by default Ensure that Full Control permission is granted when assigning share permissions for the Telephony Manager 3 1 root directory see See Figure 56 Share permissions page 113 Figure 56 Share permissions S
130. bling parent paths page 107 IIS modes of operation page 109 Adjusting Internet Explorer security settings page 110 Remote Desktop and Terminal Server page 112 Telephony Manager 3 1 server client setup page 113 Configuring client authentication on the server side page 113 Configuring security for Telephony Manager 3 1 page 118 Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions Configuration Automation Tool Some of the following configurations are automated using a script that is available for download from the Nortel Technical Support Web page for Telephony Manager 3 1 The script ConfigureWin2003SA vbs automates the workarounds that an administrator has to perform before using Telephony Manager 3 1 on a Windows Server 2003 as a stand alone application The script uses the adsutil vbs an IIS administration utility using Microsoft Visual Basic Scripting Edition VBScript with Active Directory Service Interfaces ADSI to manipulate the IIS configuration The script is installed with Windows Script Host and is in the SystemRoot system32 inetsrv adminsamples folder ConfigureWin2003SA vbs automates the following tasks e Creates the Telephony Manager Server and Jakarta Web Service extensions Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 104 Windows Server 2003 configuration e
131. box see Figure 99 Terminal server dialog box page 180 do not close from the window close button X as this loses all configuration The Terminal server window appears two lists e configured systems e configured ports The configured systems list appears information about the virtual port that is configured e Name As defined in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator e Number of clients The number of terminal clients using the port Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Terminal server 181 When selecting an entry in the Configured Ports list the clients on Port list appears the following information for each terminal client using the port From IP address of the terminal client Duration How long the connection is in use The Disconnect button next to the clients on Port list allows termination of the connection to one or more terminal clients The Terminal server application also has the following buttons e Hide Hides the application window During normal operation the Terminal server application runs without user input so hiding its window frees up some desktop space The window can be viewed at any time by double clicking the Terminal Service icon in the Task Bar tray e Systems Configures the virtual ports Virtual ports page 181 e Terminal
132. bsite gt Properties 6 Select HomeDirectory Tab gt Configuration 7 Select Options Tab and change the SessionTimeout value to 90 120 minutes the same as that selected in step 3 8 Save the changes 9 Open the Web xml file of Tomcat in the path lt TM installed path gt Tomcat conf Web xml and change the SessionTimeout value to that which was entered in the Metabase bin 10 Save the changes 11 Restart the computer End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 257 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Contents Overview This appendix contains information about the following topics Overview page 257 Capacity factors page 258 Hardware and software comparisons page 259 Software limits page 260 PC hardware page 274 Network bandwidth page 277 Telephony Manager 3 1 system performance page 285 Telephony Manager 3 1 port usage page 291 FTP Server configuration page 295 This appendix provides a set of guidelines to help you determine the configuration and distribution of Telephony Manager 3 1 servers within a network to efficiently manage Communication Server 1000 and Meridian 1 systems Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Co
133. cator 4 79 or above to trust certificate authorities used by CND servers that have SSL enabled Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 88 Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL If the CND server certificate is issued by well known certificate authorities such as VeriSign and so on the certificate authority can already be in the Netscape Communicator certificate database by default a Verify the certificate authority is included in Netscape Communicator certificate database To do this open the Communicator menu select Tools gt Security Info and then click Signers on the left side b If the certificate authority is not included in the database consult your system administrator for importing a private certificate authority 2 Locate the certificate database files used by the Netscape Communicator a From C Netscape userName directory UserName is the current logon user name select cert7 db key3 db and secmod db b Copy the three files to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Common Data directory usually under c Nortel Common Data 3 Set up the CND SSL connection in Telephony Manager 3 1 server a Open Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator select Utilities gt CND Server Setup b Set the port number to 636 or the specific SSL port number configured by the CND server c Select Use
134. cedure 13 Setting up communications information Step Action 1 Double click Sample Site in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator window 2 Click Sample System and then choose File gt Properties 3 The System Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected 4 Click Communications tab 5 Click Add The Add Communications Profile dialog box appears See Figure 41 Add Communications Profile dialog box page 94 Figure 41 Add Communications Profile dialog box Add Communications Profile x Profile Name o ok fnew profile La anci Type Help Serial PPP Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Testing the connection 95 In the Type box select a connection type for Telephony Manager 3 1 Enter a Profile Name Click OK o Oo N O Enter the information in the System Properties Communications dialog box for the connection type selected in step 6 For an Ethernet connection type see Figure 42 System Properties Communications tab Ethernet Profile page 95 a Enter the IP address that you configured on the system b Click Apply Figure 42 System Properties Communications tab Ethernet Profile Sample Site Sample Meridian 1 System Properties E x General Communications System Data Applications Customers Network m Profiles Selected Profile
135. ceed with the uninstall of the client you will have to manually delete the client from Navigator gt Utilities on the server Do you wish to continue e a Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 241 2 Click Yes to continue the Telephony Manager Client uninstallation 3 Click No to cancel the uninstallation End Procedure 66 Deleting client information on the server manually Step Action 1 Select Navigator gt Utilities gt Manage 2 Select appropriate client 3 Click delete ATTENTION A client IP can be deleted if you do a fresh installation of Telephony Manager 3 1 The only way to restore a deleted client is to reinstall the Telephony Manager software on the client PC End Reasons the Telephony Manager Client fails to map the Common Data path of the Telephony Manager Server are The Telephony Manager Server is uninstalled The Telephony Manager Server is not accessible due to hard disc crash The network between the Telephony Manager Server and the Client is down The Telephony Manager Server is shut down Uninstall using Add Remove Programs Telephony Manager 3 1 can also be uninstalled by using the Add Remove Programs window A confirmation dialog box appears see Figure 143 Uninstall confirmation page 242
136. ct to Nortel Networks copyright in the Software and user manuals will cease being effective at the date of expiration of the Nortel Networks copyright those restrictions relating to use and disclosure of Nortel Networks confidential information shall continue in effect Licensee may terminate this license at any time The license will automatically terminate if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the license Upon termination for any reason Licensee will immediately destroy or return to Nortel Networks the Software user manuals and all copies Nortel Networks is not liable to Licensee for damages in any form solely by reason of the termination of this license 8 Export and re export Licensee agrees not to export directly or indirectly the Software or related technical data or information without first obtaining any required export licenses or other governmental approvals Without limiting the foregoing Licensee on behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates agrees that it will not without first obtaining all export licenses and approvals required by the U S Government i export re export transfer or divert any such Software or technical data or any direct product thereof to any country to which such exports or re exports are restricted or embargoed under United States export control laws and regulations or to any national or resident of such restricted or embargoed countries or ii provide t
137. currence of the incoming event you can also invoke the Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor OtmStMon exe by specifying a call to it under the Actions item See Figure 122 Modify Events Actions page 218 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 218 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Figure 122 Modify Events Actions File Edit View Help ESIA Modify Events Ea Description Sources Event Message Actions Forwarding Command for Automatic Action optional OtmStMon 4 Major Popup Window Message optional eee Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor The Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor enables you to change the color of the Telephony Manager 3 1 object on the Network Map to reflect the current status of the server In addition a message is also logged onto the HP OV NNM Alarm Browser to indicate the status change OtmStMon is written in C and makes use of the HP OV ovevent application OtmStMon takes in two parameters an object s selection name and a textual representation of the new status for example Critical or Normal If ovevent cannot locate an object on the current Network Map with the specified selection name an error message appears Therefore if a Telephony Manager 3 1 object is not defined in the Network Map OtmStMon are not invoked for
138. d in order to support file transfer operations in ITG Services and Corporate Directory applications To configure go to Start gt Programs gt Telephony Manager Navigator From the Configuration menu select Configure FTP Server and enter the correct Telephony Manager Server IP address username and password See Figure 158 Configure FTP server page 296 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 296 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Figure 158 Contigure als server tel CS 1000 Te depho Manager Navigator TTG ISDN JP Trunks ITG Mi IP Trk 2 tes E Sample Ste amp fi 15 Lab Innovatis Te Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 297 Appendix B Installation checklist Contents This appendix contains information about the following topics Overview page 297 Installation requirements page 297 Programming the switch page 298 PC server installation requirements page 298 Overview Use the following quick reference as a checklist or reminder when starting a new Telephony Manager 3 1 installation Installation requirements Software and memory Required X11 packages 296 315 and 351 depending on applications
139. dem connections The following procedures are solutions to the most common troubles Modem does not dial Procedure 30 Verifying that the modem is properly configured Step Action 1 From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel 2 Open the Modems file and click Properties End Procedure 31 Testing the COM port Step Action Test the COM port to which the modem is connected by launching HyperTerminal 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt Accessories gt HyperTerminal Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 152 Configuring a modem for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications This action tests the COM port to which the modem is connected by launching the HyperTerminal HyperTerminal prompts for a connection name and presents the telephone number dialog box In the Connect Using drop down list box select Direct to COM X where X is the COM port to which the modem is connected When in the terminal type the command AT lt Enter gt The modem responds with OK If the modem does not respond the wrong COM port may be being used End To verify that the correct COM port is being used Procedure 32 Verifying the COM port Step Action 1 In the File Properties menu select Direct to COM Y where Yisa different COM port 2 When the correct CO
140. dialog box appears See Figure 98 New User Properties dialog box page 174 Figure 98 New User Properties dialog box Joe User Properties E x General Ue Te EE Login Name Joe Change Password Description Secretary Phone Number e1 3 555 1212 Job Title pooooooooooooooooooooo0on Comment 7 z User Group fEndUser Status Dk Current Status oK Last Change 09 17 03 14 53 25 Last Login No login date Cancel Apply Help 2 Select a User Type from the drop down list e Local Users who are authenticated using an account on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server e Remote Users who are authenticated using CND or domain When Remote is selected the Change Password button as well as the Status and Current Status controls are disabled 3 Enter a User ID ATTENTION The user name cannot contain spaces including between the first and last name or special characters such as forward slash backward slash brackets plus sign equals sign semi colon 5 comma asterisk single quote or double quote Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Authenticating users 175 4 From the User Group drop down list select the group to use as the basis for this user definition 5 Enter other data as required 6 Click Apply Tel
141. does not require a search of the CND Directory to find the user s assigned user group the Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account method provides the best logon performance If multiple authentication methods is chosen Telephony Manager 3 1 respects the order configured however it should be noted that the best performance is achieved by using the Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account method For information about configuring authentication methods using the User Authentication Web page see User authentication in Teleohony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 For information about configuring authentication methods using the User Authentication Windows dialog box see User authentication in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 Password policy Password security during transport across the network is accomplished in the following manner Default passwords on the Call Server Signalling Server and the Voice Gateway Media Card are forced changed by the software Telephony Manager 3 1 uses the PWD1 PWD2 and PDT passwords for certain functions that interact with the Call Server Signalling Server and Voice Gateway Media Card If any of the passwords expire due to the force change feature Telephony Manager 3 1 functionality fails similar to having incorrect passwords The passwords must be updated manually on the Call Server Signalling Server and Voice Gateway Media Card through CLI comman
142. dow appears if the Telephony Manager 3 1 client computer s host name is changed or if the Telephony Manager 3 1 client is removed from the Telephony Manager 3 1 database If the host name of an Telephony Manager 3 1 client computer is changed the Telephony Manager 3 1 Administrator can use the client Utility to update the host name in the Telephony Manager 3 1 database For information about the client Utility see Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 Security device dongle Parallel dongle A Dongle is a small hardware security device attached to the PC In Telephony Manager 3 1 the dongle attached to the server enables access for all of the clients configured on the server When Telephony Manager 3 1 is launched from a Telephony Manager 3 1 client the Telephony Manager 3 1 server s dongle is checked The Telephony Manager 3 1 client cannot launch the Telephony Manager 3 1 System Window if the Telephony Manager 3 1 server s dongle is missing If the dongle is removed from the Telephony Manager 3 1 server it takes approximately 5 minutes when it is reattached for the Telephony Manager 3 1 client to recognize the dongle ATTENTION When a user attempts to log on to Web Navigator after installing Telephony Manager 3 1 for the first time an error message displays stating that the Telephony Manager 3 1 dongle is missing when in fact it is not missing If this occurs the dongle timer is set to a two minute interval
143. ds Telephony Manager 3 1 system properties must also be updated with the new passwords before proceeding with any Telephony Manager 3 1 functionality Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows client passwords are encrypted using Crypto APIs prior to transmission The same private key is used by both the client and the server Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 162 Security Management e For Telephony Manager 3 1 Web clients by default clear text passwords are used however if the Telephony Manager 3 1 server has the proper certificate installed the use of SSL encrypted transport during authentication can be forced To use the SSL during the authentication process the Telephony Manager 3 1 server must have the required certificate installed as described in Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL page 85 Click the Use SSL for Web logon authentication check box after installing the certificate Before using SSL on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server the Telephony Manager 3 1 server must have the required certificate installed as described in Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL page 85 If Use SSL for Web logon authentication is selected Web logon is performed using https instead of http and traffic is encrypted The Telephony Manager 3 1 server automatically switches to non SSL transport
144. e Note that call record generation varies depending upon how the switch is used so having a good understanding of the customers call volume is highly recommended The sizing guidelines are provided to help ensure that Telephony Manager 3 1 performs optimally Telephony Manager 3 1 billing still operates past these limitations but with degraded performance Performance concerns that arise from using Telephony Manager 3 1 past the recommended limitation is not considered a product deficiency Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 272 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines ATTENTION The time to cost CDR records and generate reports is directly proportional to the size of the call record database For larger or busier switches the response time for costing CDR and generating reports are slower than with a smaller switch that doesn t generate as many call records Operational limits Telephony Manager 3 1 Web interface The Telephony Manager 3 1 Web interface provides the ability to access the Telephony Manager 3 1 server from any PC with a Web browser Usage of the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web interface does not require installation of the Telephony Manager 3 1 client however using the Web interface places a heavier workload on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server as processing is concentrat
145. e Figure 28 Choose Folder page 69 Figure 28 Choose Folder xi Please select the installation Folder Path C Program Files Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 0 Directories My Computer H E Local Disk C New Volume D vobstorel on 164 164 8 216 E E vobstore2 on 164 164 8 216 F view on view M vikasy_OTM_2 1 on view vikasy_OTM_2 2_new on view 2 H ER My Network Places xi BP m m 0 A E ae cn 7 Specify a destination directory and click OK ATTENTION You must not install Telephony Manager 3 1 in the root directory for example C During the installation process you must specify a folder for example C Nortel 8 Clicking the Disk Space button in Figure 11 Program and Data Location page 52 displays the Available Disk Space dialog box see Figure 29 Available Disk Space page 70 showing the available disk space in each of the drives on the PC If the selected drive doesn t have enough disk space to accommodate the selected options an error message appears asking the user to select another drive Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 70 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software Figure 29 Available Disk Space i Available Disk Space 9 The Installation Summa
146. e Telephony Manager 3 1 Web tree The User Groups page appears See Figure 90 User Groups page page 141 Figure 90 User Groups page Brortel C5 1000 Telephony Manager Microsoft Internet Explorer ao Bile Edt yew Favortes Joos Heb ki Gut O i id GO Psemh wr Ol CaA Ua sd Adgress http 10 20 0 SfOmNavigator MenuNavigator Eng def ak asp SessionID 54526472 74S 45a0 94ac abc62 d0Ib0a JB Go _ links 2 NORTEL CS 1000 Telephony Manager Current Status System Navigator U G System Alarms set Troups Telephones Search Add User Groups control what the user can access on the Telephony Manager Windows and Web Templates Navigators They also control access to the Web based Telephone pages Hardware Syne Tasks User Groups are added and deleted in the Telephony Manager Windows Navigator Sync Logs Reports ii Last moaiied Number of Users Preferences 1299 2001 3 51 57 PM 0 HelpDesk 12 9 2001 353 49 PM_ 10 SSR EndUser 1206 2001 4 45 04 PM_ 0 Add Default 1128 2001 3 58 45PM_ 0 Syne Reports Telecom Billing Reports Web TBS Syne Reports Web Administration Custom Help User Authentication User Groups Navigator access Access to the sites systems and applications available in both the Windows and Webs is controlled on a user group basis through the User Group Properties Java application Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0
147. e a valid local user account user name and password and an ENMS user account to log on to InfoCenter Procedure 46 Logging in to InfoCenter Step Action 1 From the Windows Start menu choose Programs gt Optivity gt InfoCenter The ENMS InfoCenter logon window appears 2 Type the UserlD password and the name of the ENMS server and then click OK ENMS InfoCenter appears 3 In the Folders pane click the InfoCenter icon 4 Double click the Resources folder to open it 5 A Telephony Managers folder appears Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Using ENMS InfoCenter 195 A Telephony Managers folder is created in ENMS InfoCenter to contain all the Voice Elements integrated into ENMS 6 Double click the Telephony Managers folder to open it 7 Modify the default view properties of the folder or you cannot view the Telephony Manager 3 1 servers that are added to this folder Right click the Telephony Managers folder and choose Properties Open the Management server folder Select Telephony Manager and click Apply 8 From the InfoCenter menu bar choose File gt New gt Object The Object Properties dialog box appears with the Device tab selected See Figure 105 InfoCenter Object Properties dialog box page 196 a Inthe Label box type a label for the new object b Inthe T
148. e run on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server for example DBA collection of CDR Station administration by the server Windows GUI interface Note that if Telephony Manager 3 1 clients are used the connection to the systems Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Network bandwidth 279 is directly from the Telephony Manager 3 1 clients not through the Telephony Manager 3 1 server e The number of systems administered by Telephony Manager 3 1 and what network connectivity is available to these systems A key point is that a high quality connection is required between the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and Telephony Manager 3 1 clients On the other hand the connection between the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and Web clients or between the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and managed systems requires significantly lower bandwidth and most WAN connections should be adequate Data networking guidelines The Data Networking NTP Data Networking for Voice over IP 553 300 1 160 gives an overview of all network connections together with guidelines for their usage It is important to understand and follow the recommendations in it Only a few key points are mentioned here and the Data Networking NTP should be consulted for details e fitis planned to connect the ELAN subnet to the enterprise IP network a layer thr
149. eb servers e Change the ENMS Apache Web server HTTP port from the default value of 80 prior to running IIS installation If a port clash occurs the default port on the Apache server must be changed Telephony Manager 3 1 ENMS integration Telephony Manager 3 1 does not automatically install any OIT files You must manually install the OIT files The OIT files can be downloaded from the OIT support Web page Procedure 43 Downloading the OIT files Step Action 1 In your Web browser go to http www nortel com 2 Click the Product link 3 In the drop down list select ENMS OIT and click Save 4 In the drop down list for software types select ENMS OIT for Telephony Manager 5 Click the link under the Description heading that matches your operating system platform 6 Click the link to the Readme file to view the installation instructions in your Web browser This file is also included in the zipped archive 7 Click the link to the zipped archive to download the latest Telephony Manager 3 1 OIT files End Integration with ENMS version 10 4 ENMS version 10 4 comes pre installed with the device OIT files required for releases of Telephony Manager to OTM 2 0 The device OIT file for OTM 2 0 and the application OIT file must be downloaded and installed manually The application OIT file is common to all releases of Telephony Manager These OIT files can be obtained from the OIT support Web page See Procedure 43 Downloadi
150. ed as is migration from a USB dongle to a parallel port dongle To accommodate this order the transfer code that replaces a parallel port dongle with a USB dongle When a customer orders a dongle transfer and goes from a parallel port to USB or vice versa the old dongle serial number is no longer valid The keycode issued is for the new dongle serial number and does not work on the old dongle The customer is expected to discard the old dongle This dongle swap or transfer is only for end user licensed dongles not for distributor or enterprise licensed dongles Distributors can just simply order more dongles of either type Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 93 Before configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview Overview page 93 Testing the connection page 94 Ethernet network optional page 94 Setting up communications information page 94 Setting up customer information page 97 Procedure 15 Setting up Telephony Manager 3 1 applications page 99 Setting up system data page 101 Before configuring for Telephony Manager 3 1 test the connection between Telephony Manager 3 1 and your equipment using the sample site and system configuration Follow the procedure in this chapter Af
151. ed at the Telephony Manager 3 1 server instead of distributed across the Telephony Manager 3 1 clients Telephone manager Full station administration capability is available through telephone manager A station change operation from the Web would include the following tasks e 2 seconds to find the telephone e 6 seconds to display the details e 5 seconds to validate and save e 4seconds to schedule transmission task e 22 seconds for the actual transmission to the PBX The times listed above measure the time lapse as experienced by the user They do not represent the actual CPU time consumed on the server Only the final task of transmitting to the PBX involves 100 of server time Other tasks consist primarily of time spent rendering HTML on the client browser Web Desktop Services for end users When you configure the write capability for end users in Web Desktop Services you also place a higher workload on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server However the ability for end users to make changes may decrease the need for the network administrator to make changes therefore the impact of configuring the write capability for end users in Web Desktop Services may not be significant in certain configurations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Software limits 273 Web support on server and Workstati
152. ed files box click Add and then select the path and the name of the file that handles requests for the specific extension For Telephony Manager 3 1 the path and file name is lt tmroot gt WebSer vices OMNavigator SystemNavigator Bin ISAPISystemNavigator dll 5 Repeat step 4 for Jakarta ISAPI file After selecting the path and file name lt tmroot gt Tomcat Bin ISAPI_redirector2 dll click OK 6 Click to select the Set extension status to Allowed check box 7 Click OK to save your changes End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 107 Figure 50 Enabling new ISAPI extension New Web Service Extension x Type the name of the new Web service extension and specify the files that must be enabled for the extension to run Extension name TM Extensions Required files C Program Files Nortel Telephony Manager Tomcat bin C Program Files Nortel Telephony Manager WebServic Add Remove VV Set exi ed cont e Enabling parent paths Parent paths are automated using the script Enabling parent paths specifies whether an ASP page permits paths relative to the current directory using the notation In IIS 6 0 parent paths are no longer enabled by default This affects Telephony Manager 3 1 as it ha
153. ed for to function substantially as described in its accompanying user manual during its warranty period which begins on the date Software is first shipped to Licensee If any item of Software fails to so function during its warranty period as the sole remedy Nortel Networks will at its discretion provide a suitable fix patch or workaround for the problem that may be included in a future Software release Nortel Networks further warrants to Licensee that the media on which the Software is provided will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days from the date the Software is first shipped to Licensee Nortel Networks will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to Nortel Networks during the warranty period along with proof of the date of shipment This warranty does not apply if the media has been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse The Licensee assumes all responsibility for selection of the Software to achieve Licensee s intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software Nortel Networks does not warrant a that the functions contained in the software will meet the Licensee s requirements b that the Software will operate in the hardware or software combinations that the Licensee may select c that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free or d that all defects in the operation of the Software will be corrected
154. ee Meridian 1 Remote Access PC Client Subnet u B 3 i sy SE NMS LDAP server wr hg aN OTMWeb Client IP connections to systems IP connection overview The Telephony Manager 3 1 solution consists of the Telephony Manager 3 1 server Telephony Manager 3 1 clients and Telephony Manager 3 1 Web clients These may be connected in several different configurations The particular configuration chosen depends on the tasks to be performed and the network environment The following are some of the considerations when deciding on the configuration e Are there multiple administrators Do they require full administration capabilities available with Telephony Manager 3 1 clients or is Web client functionality sufficient The answers to these questions determine the need for Telephony Manager 3 1 clients The Telephony Manager 3 1 clients connection to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server must have high bandwidth and low Round Trip Time RTT characteristics as documented in the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and client overview page 61 and in this appendix Network bandwidth page 277 Because a WAN connection is not generally suitable this affects the placement of Telephony Manager 3 1 clients The Telephony Manager 3 1 clients require connections to the systems they are managing The Telephony Manager 3 1 server requires connections to the systems if the Web client is used or if applications ar
155. ee switch or router capable of packet filtering MUST be used to separate the ELAN subnet from the enterprise IP network The packet filter MUST be configured to prevent broadcast multicast and unauthorized traffic from entering the ELAN subnet Ifthe ELAN subnet is connected to the enterprise IP network without a packet filtering router the system s call handling ability may be adversely affected It is recommended to use a layer two or layer three Ethernet switch for all subnets This is particularly important on the ELAN subnet when other application servers for example SCCS are present The use of shared media hubs can result in adverse system impact under some conditions ELAN connection options The Telephony Manager 3 1 server and Telephony Manager 3 1 client require connectivity to the ELAN subnets of the managed systems There are two choices for this ELAN configuration e The Telephony Manager 3 1 server or client is connected only to the Nortel server subnet or another subnet of the customer s Enterprise IP network and has a routed connection to the ELAN subnets of managed systems This is the more flexible and preferred configuration e The Telephony Manager 3 1 server or client has a network interface that connects directly to the ELAN subnet A second network interface is also present to connect to the Nortel server subnet This is referred to as a Dual NIC configuration Such a setup is suitable if there is only one Te
156. elephony Manager 3 1 Web Navigator applications A local server account is created for each existing Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows user The new account is assigned to the appropriate user group Existing Telephony Manager 3 1 Telephone Access Profiles which were based on user groups are migrated from the Web Navigator database to the new user group database This assumes that the corresponding groups related to them already exist These user groups are also migrated to the telephone manager database however new user groups do not have access to telephone manager administration Access to telephone manager Administration must be configured by using the User Groups Web page User groups page 140 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator users 167 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator users Telephony Manager 3 1 permits the creation of user groups to speed the process of adding users accessing the Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator and certain Telephony Manager 3 1 Web based applications In the User Group Properties dialog box most aspects of a certain kind of user are defined by the administrator such as level of access to sites and systems and automatic connection to particular systems As many user groups as required can be created Individua
157. ements and Coresidency support list the baseline configuration that Nortel has tested and supports Any deviation from the configurations has not been tested and is supported by Nortel only on a best effort basis unless otherwise indicated Hard coded limits This section lists the hard coded limits in the Telephony Manager 3 1 software Table 15 Telephony Manager 3 1 capacity parameters page 266 outlines the maximum value for many of the parameters associated with the various components of Telephony Manager 3 1 Table 15 Telephony Manager 3 1 capacity parameters Parameter Maximum Value Windows Common Services Maximum number of Sites that can be created on a Telephony 3 000 Manager 3 1 server Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Software limits 267 Parameter Maximum Value Maximum number of MG 1000B systems can be created under a 256 specific site Maximum number of synchronization Update tasks number of Log Windows that can be executed at the same time Number of Customers 100 Range of DN 0 9 999 999 Maximum number of Survivable Expansion Cabinet 4 Maximum number of modem scripts that can be created 3 000 Windows Common Services Maximum number of application jobs that can be scheduled in the 2 000 Scheduler application Max String Length for Site name 31
158. ephone Keys page the Change button does not appear 3 Click Apply to apply your changes End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 146 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users Features tab In the Features tab see Figure 93 Telephone access properties dialog box Features tab page 146 use the check box and list of features to determine whether the Telephone Features page appears and if so which features the users in this group can view and change The list of features contains all the non key features listed alphabetically by prompt in LD 10 and LD 11 Each feature is assigned a restriction of Hidden ReadOnly or ReadwWrite If Hidden the feature does not appear in the end user Feature drop down list Read Write capability requires the Telephony Manager 3 1 Premium package Figure 93 Telephone access properties dialog box Features tab lolx Name Last Modified Number of Users Administrators 12 2 2005 4 05 20 PM 0 Navigator Telephone General Properties Show Trouble Shooting link 7 Directory Options v Allow user to restore pending changes 7 Keys Read write Allow user to synchronize changes 7 Features Administration Features Set each feature to be hidden read only or read write Show
159. ephony Manager 3 1 prompts the entry of a password 7 Enter the password and click OK to change the Telephony Manager 3 1 logon password for this user only 8 Click OK The new user appears in the Telephony Manager 3 1 User window Close the Telephony Manager 3 1 User window End Authenticating users One of the following methods can be selected to authenticate Telephony Manager 3 1 users e Local Server account Window Domain account e CND authentication The Administrator account is always authenticated through the local server account because it is a default account on all supported Windows platforms The default authentication method is the Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account This method provides the best logon performance because there is no requirement to search the CND Directory for the user s assigned User Group To configure authentication complete Procedure 38 Configure authentication page 168 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 176 Security Management Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 177 Initial logon Windows users are authenticated using either a local account on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server a Window
160. ephony Manager 3 1 server platform Step Action 1 Launch the application from Programs gt Administrative Tools gt Internet Information Services IIS Manager 2 From the left navigator pane select Web Sites gt Default Web Site 3 Right click on Default Web Site and select Properties 4 From the Properties window select Directory Security tab and click Server Certificate under Secure Communications The Web server Certificate Wizard then walks you through the installation of the certificate 5 After the certificate installation is completed go to the Default Website Properties window and select the Web site tab Ensure the SSL Port is set to 443 End Enabling SSL for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web logon Procedure 10 Enabling SSL for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web logon Step Action To enable SSL for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web logon complete the following procedure 1 From Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator Windows or Web launch the User Authentication application 2 Select the check box Use SSL for Web logon authentication End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Setting up CND SSL 87 Importing Telephony Manager 3 1 Root Certificate Enabling SSL for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web logon can cause long delays before the logon page is displayed When IIS receives an incoming SSL requ
161. equisites and install Telephony Manager 3 1 The installation of Telephony Manager 3 1 automatically performs the OIT integration steps Steps 1 through 6 as shown in Procedure 44 Checking the current configuration page 190 is used to check the OIT Checklist for a Telephony Manager 3 1 installation on an existing ENMS server Procedure 44 Checking the current configuration Step Action 1 log on to ENMS as Administrator Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks About oitInstall 191 About oitinstall Check for the environment variable LNMSHOME View environment variables using the System option in Control Panel on the Environment Variables tab This variable holds the path of the Optivity installation typically c Optivity NMS All the executables are located in c Optivity NMS bin Check for the environment variable OITHOME This environment variable points to the Optivity Integration Toolkit home directory typically C Optivity oit If unable to find OITTHOME create it Copy Telephony Manager 3 1 OIT files to the appropriate subdirectories in OITHOME All of the subdirectories under Optivity Oit on the Telephony Manager 3 1 CD ROM are copied to OITHOME Run LNMSHOME bin oitinstall u lt full path of TM 3 1 OIT file gt for every oit file in the Telephony Manager Directory
162. er 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 28 Overview Nee TN TT sSCSCSCSC aAAL TM Telephony Manager PTY pseudo TTY network port RAS remote access server RU reporting unit SNMP simple network management protocol SSL secure sockets layer TBS Telecom Billing System TLAN telephony local area network TN terminal number TTY teletype serial port uid unique identifier in LDAP synchronization VPN Virtual Private Network VLAN virtual local area network WAN wide area network Nortel server subnet formerly known as the CLAN is the subnet to which the Telephony Manager Network interface is connected Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Preparing for installation Contents Overview This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview page 29 Telephony Manager 3 1 installation tasks page 30 Supported systems page 30 Supported upgrade paths page 32 Telephony Manager 3 1 server and clients overview page 32 Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements page 33 Telephony Manager 3 1 software requirements page 36 Telephony Manager 3 1 combines with the Enterprise Network Management System ENMS to give an integrated data voice and video network
163. er is brought up with the Web based Telephony Manager 3 1 interface You can log on to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web and access the various Telephony Manager 3 1 applications including the Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm Browser End Installation and configuration Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm Integration Package HP OV PC 1 Copy the OtmStMon exe to the Openview bin 6OV_BIN directory 2 Copy the OtmOpenAlarm mib to the directory OV_SNMP_MIB Ven dor Nortel Create this directory if it does not already exist HP OV NNM HP OV PC The following configuration procedures are performed while NNM is running Procedure 54 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm MIB Step Action 1 Select Options gt Load Unload MIBs SNMP See Figure 115 NNM Load Unload MIBs page 212 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 212 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Figure 115 NNM Load Unload MIBs 2 Click Load in the Load Unload MIBs dialog box See Figure 116 Load Unload MIBs page 212 Figure 116 Load Unload MIBs tfe1902 SNMPv2 SMI tfe1903 SNMPv2 TC tfe1906 SNMPv2 TM Thee 3 Open the OtmOpenAlarm mib file See Figure 117 Load MIB page 213 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard
164. er manuals are protected under copyright laws Nortel Networks and or its licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and user manuals including any revisions made by Nortel Networks or its licensors The copyright notice must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or user manuals Licensee may not modify translate decompile disassemble use for any competitive analysis reverse engineer distribute or create derivative works from the Software or user manuals or any copy in whole or in part Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee may not copy or transfer the Software or user manuals in whole or in part The Software and user manuals embody Nortel Networks and its licensors confidential and proprietary intellectual property Licensee shall not disclose to any third party the Software or any information about the operation design performance or implementation of the Software and user manuals that is confidential to Nortel Networks and its licensors however Licensee may grant permission to its consultants subcontractors and agents to use the Software at Licensee s facility provided they have agreed to use the Software only in accordance with the terms of this license Limited warranty Nortel Networks warrants each item of Software as delivered by Nortel Networks and properly installed and operated on Nortel Networks hardware or other equipment it is originally licens
165. erver and Voice Gateway Media Card ELAN interfaces for example to pull OM reports for IP Telephony e Access from the Telephony Manager 3 1 client or Web client for Element Manager access when launched from the Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator Connectivity from the Telephony Manager 3 1 server or client to the Nortel server subnet is required for the following operations If an ELAN Network interface is not present to the ELAN subnet of any managed system a routed connection is required from the Nortel server subnet interface to the ELAN subnet e Telephony Manager 3 1 client access to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server Due to the high bandwidth requirements of this connection it is important that the Telephony Manager 3 1 client to Telephony Manager 3 1 server connection not be made through the ELAN subnet e Web client access to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server e Access by a remote access software package for example pcAnywhere e CND synchronization with the customer CND server Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Network bandwidth 281 e Forwarding of SNMP traps to a NMS could be just Telephony Manager 3 1 traps or notification traps for managed systems events Telephony Manager 3 1 network configuration scenarios The following are some typical Telephony Manager 3 1 configur
166. es the configuration information in the registry for other Windows applications to access The same is also true for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications where the modem configuration information is obtained by searching the Windows registry with the COM port specified in the communication profile Telephony Manager 3 1 communications software then sets up the Run Time Container RTC with the modem initialization string and communication profile settings for the application to make its connection to the system Limitations When configuring modems the following limitations with this process must be taken into account The Windows Modem control panel allows multiple modems to be configured on the same COM port however to ensure proper modem operation configure only one modem or communication device on a given COM port e A factory modem initialization INIT string is stored in the Windows registry Telephony Manager 3 1 applications use this INIT string to set Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 150 Configuring a modem for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications up the modem connection The Telephony Manager 3 1 communications software is written to use verbal V1 result code If the factory INIT string is set to use numeric VO result code the Can t set modem parameters error message occurs a
167. est from a client it attempts to build its certificate chain before sending its certificate information back to the client During this time if the IIS computer does not have the issuing certificate authority s root certificate installed locally it tries to connect to the certificate authority directly to obtain it This causes the server to try and resolve the certificate authority s machine name or fully qualified domain name to an IP address If the certificate authority certificate server is inaccessible from the IIS computer then IIS continues to resolve the certificate authority s IP address until it times out These name resolution queries cause SSL connection delays To resolve this the client can import the Telephony Manager 3 1 root certificate into the browser s certificate storage To import the Telephony Manager 3 1 root certificate into Internet Explorer certificate storage complete the following procedure Procedure 11 Importing Telephony Manager 3 1 Root Certificate Step Action 1 Make the Telephony Manager 3 1 server certificate available to the client PC From Internet Explorer select Tools gt Internet Options Select Content tab and click Certificates Select Trusted Root Certification Authorities tab a fF WO N Click Import The Certificate Import Wizard walks you through the import process End Setting up CND SSL Procedure 12 Setting up CND SSL Step Action 1 Set up Netscape Communi
168. etermined as follows e Fora Generic system it uses the profile serial or network selected in the Application page in System Properties e For anon Generic system it uses the communication settings from the profile Serial or network assigned to Virtual System Terminal in the Applications page in System Properties For any system if a network Ethernet profile is selected Terminal server uses a Telnet connection To configure virtual port connection for a device click Systems in the Terminal server window or double click a Configured System in the list this selects the corresponding device in the Virtual Port Properties window allowing you to quickly change the settings for a particular device To enable virtual port connection for a device do one of the following e Double click the disabled port in the tree e Select the item and select the Enabled check box e Click Enable All This enables all the items listed in the tree with the default configuration The item becomes bold to show that it is enabled The field to the right of the Enabled check box automatically fills in the Site System name for the selected device This is the name displayed in the Terminal server s main window To disable a virtual port do one of the following e Double click an enabled item in the tree e Select the item and clear the Enabled check box e Click Disable All This disables all the devices listed in the tree The item is no lon
169. ffice Configuration for the Survivable Remote Gateway 50 Information in this document complements information found in documents in the Communication Server 1000 documentation suite Branch Office Installation and Configuration NN4300 1 314 Describes the Branch Office feature and contains information on planning installation configuration and maintenance e Emergency Services Access NN43001 613 Describes the Emergency Services Access feature What s New for Communication Server 1000 Release 5 0 NN43001 1 15 Contains information about systems components and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 5 0 software e Succession 1000 M Main Office Configuration for SRG Succession software version 3 1 P0609617 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 22 New in this release Provides an overview of Succession programming to support Survivable Remote Gateway SRG as a branch office Online To access Nortel documentation online click the Technical Documentation link under Support on the Nortel home page www nortel com CD ROM To obtain Nortel documentation on CD ROM contact your Nortel customer representative Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009
170. for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications149 Contents 149 Using installation tools 149 Configuring high speed smart modems 150 Troubleshooting modem connections 151 Security Management 157 Security for upgrades and re installations 158 Administrators 159 Users 159 Authentication 160 User management 162 Logon process 163 User groups 164 User management recommendations 166 Installation 166 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator users 167 Creating a user group 170 Adding auser 173 Authenticating users 175 Initial logon 177 Setting up the CND server and Terminal server 179 CND server 179 Terminal server 179 Configuring the Web browser client 185 Configure Windows XP SP2 to work with Telephony Manager 3 1 185 Accessing the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server from a Web browser 186 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS 187 Contents 187 Overview 188 Integration requirements 188 Telephony Manager 3 1 ENMS integration 189 Telephony Manager OIT files 190 About oitinstall 191 Using ENMS InfoCenter 192 Viewing Telephony Manager 3 1 server object properties 196 Modifying Telephony Manager 3 1 server object properties 197 Starting Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications 197 JRE release specific to Apache Tomcat 199 Using FaultSummary 200 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 203 LLL Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Stand
171. for dongle checking instead of the regular 30 minute interval Therefore the user must wait a maximum of only two minutes to attempt another Web Navigator logon Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 92 License management The dongle is supported on both the Server and Standalone configurations e supports one USB dongle only or one parallel port dongle A dongle connected to a USB port at the same time as one connected to a parallel port is not supported Two dongles connected at the same time is not supported DongleRead exe DongleRead exe is included in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation CD When launched the DongleRead exe utility reads the serial number of the dongle attached to the PC and displays it in the DongleRead window SeeFigure 40 DongleRead page 92 The Sentinal Security driver must be installed for the DongleRead exe to function Figure 40 DongleRead Serial Number oTm12345 PCI port limitations PCl based parallel ports can have problems on certain operating systems Compaq Proliant DL360R01 running Windows 2000 Server using a Lava PCI Bus Enhanced Parallel Port card is one such system Telephony Manager 3 1 does not support this configuration Transfer from parallel port dongle to USB dongle Migration from a parallel port dongle to USB dongle is support
172. g Web site to obtain the phone number for your region www nortel com callus Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 18 How to get help Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers you can use an Express Routing Code ERC to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service To locate the ERC for your product or service go to www nortel com erc Getting help through a Nortel distributor or re seller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized re seller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or re seller Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks New in this release New in Telephony Manager 3 1 This document incorporates new changes in Telephony Manager 3 1 To configure and manage the PBX release 5 0 Telephony Manager TM software must be upgraded to Telephony Manager 3 1 Telephony Manager 3 1 features the following installation and upgrade enhancements License Agreement available upon installation reflects the modified version and copyright year All migration and upgrade limitations for Tele
173. ge 68 providing a choice of either Default or Custom installation options Select Default Figure 26 Setup Type Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Select the setup type to install Please select a setup type O Defaut 1N Core Program and English Web Help wil be instaled These AR All program feat ok will be installed on defauk folder Install Sie If Default is chosen the Installation Summary page appears and the installation proceeds with default values If Custom is chosen the following pages appear Figure 27 Common Data Destination Folder Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Choose Program and Data Location that of Core Program Common Data folder store Jestination Folder Space Required on Space Avalable or basta Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing the client software 69 Ensure that you browse to the Common Data folder that is stored on the actual Telephony Manager Server using the mapped drive Figure 27 Common Data Destination Folder page 68 shows the Common Data Destination Folder screen The Common Data Destination Folder Browse button allows the user to select the destination folder for the Common Data Clicking the Browse button displays the Choose Folder dialog box se
174. ger 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 260 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Software limits Coresidency support Table 14 Coresidency support page 260 shows the current list of available coresidency support for Telephony Manager 3 1 Table 14 Coresidency support Windows XP IE 6 English Excel 2003 3 1 English Enterprise Subscriber Professional Word 2003 client or Manager ESM 1 1 standalone from Office Common Network XP in Directory CND 2 1 English Enterprise Network Management System ENMS 10 4 Client CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Application Builder Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client Remote Gateway 9100 series Configuration Mgr previously known as Remote Office 1 5 2 1 6 0 1 7 PCAnywhere 11 5 Timbuktu Pro 7 8 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard and professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan 9 0 NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Concord Edge Agent 5 7 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Software limits 261 Windows 2000 Professional Windows Server 2003 Windows 2000 Server IE 6 English IE 6 or IE 7 IE 6 English Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in English Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in English Excel
175. ger bold and does not appear from the Terminal server main window when you click OK Serial connections The Terminal server application supports all the serial ports on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server PC plus the systems configured in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator Telephony Manager can support 10 COM ports assuming that the user already has 2 ports configured on his PC and another 8 ports are added Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Terminal server 183 For a serial connection Direct to Com x appears where x is the com port number The fields for serial settings are enabled The default is the serial settings from the Telephony Manager 3 1 database The settings in the dialog box can be changed as shown Figure 101 Virtual Port Properties Serial with Logging enabled page 183 Figure 101 Virtual Port Properties Serial with Logging enabled Virtual Port Properties x Virtual Port 1 IV Enabled r Sample Site Sample System Devices Direct to Com 2 d Sample Site Cancel Santa Clara 1 Network Settings Refresh Sample System I scH M HTC Telnet Port Meridian Mail a Help d Toronto Lab E soi E TFF Sample System Serial Settings Bits per second Data bits 3600 7 fs pa Parity Stop bits None 7 fi 7 Path Tetminal Bin Sample Si
176. grade of databases Telephony Manager 3 1 provides the option to upgrade from OTM 1 20 2 0 2 01 and 2 1 involving two steps 1 Upgrade from OTM 1 20 2 0 2 01 or 2 1 to OTM 2 2 2 Upgrade from OTM 2 2 to Telephony Manager 3 1 Operating system migration WARNING Back up the Alarm Notification control and script files separately The script files can be replaced during a software upgrade Complete the following steps to migrate from OTM 2 2 installed on one operating system to Telephony Manager 3 1 on a different operating system Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Operating system migration 81 Procedure 7 Operating system migration Step Action 1 Upgrade OTM 2 2 to Telephony Manager 3 1 on the existing operating system 2 Reboot the system and allow database migration to complete 3 Launch the Telephony Manager 3 1 navigator gt utilities gt Backup utility Perform a full backup 4 Install Telephony Manager 3 1 on the new supported operating system 5 Reboot the system 6 Launch the Telephony Manager 3 1 navigator gt utilities gt Restore utility Perform the restore operation using the full backup file created on the original operating system End ATTENTION Following the system upgrade and reboot the Database Migration Utility runs autom
177. gures Windows user groups and individual users using the Windows user interface The administrator then determines the access permissions for each user group by using the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Navigator page For more information about setting user access refer to User groups page 164 Security for upgrades and re installations As a security precaution with any upgrade or reinstallation of Telephony Manager 3 1 software access properties for all user groups are reset to the default values Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Users 159 Administrators Users Users of the Telephony Manager 3 1 Administration Site belong to a distinct user group and are assigned the security profile for that user group Users are not able to alter access permissions for the Administrators user group Members of the Administrators user group can e log on to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Administration Web site Access all Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications e Assign access rights to the other user groups e Assign access rights to applications HelpDesk users have access to all applications except those listed under Web Administration No other user groups have any access to Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications unless that group has been specifically granted appropriate permissions e Assign access r
178. hapter contains information about configuring the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web browser client Make sure that the PC client requirements are met as described in Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements page 33 Configure Windows XP SP2 to work with Telephony Manager 3 1 ATTENTION Ensure firewalls and NAT routers are configured appropriately for Telephony Manager to facilitate free communication between the Telephony Manager server and clients and between the Telephony Manager server clients and communication servers Procedure 41 Configure Windows XP SP2 to work with Telephony Manager 3 1 Step Action 1 Open Control Panel gt Windows Firewall Choose one of the following options a Select General tab and then set Windows Firewall to Off or b Select Exceptions tab and then select only those applications that you want network access enabled 2 To enable Web applications from the Internet Explorer menu bar select Tools gt Manage Add Ons gt and then select Add ons that have been used by Internet Explorer in Show dropdown and enable each of the required items 3 From the Internet Explorer menu bar select Tools gt Pop Up Blocker gt and then enable Pop Up Blocker Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 186 Configuring the Web browser client 4 From the Internet Exp
179. hare Permissions Group or user names Everyone OTM Users BROBIN R4 0TM Users Add Remove Permissions for OTM Users Allow Deny Full Control Change Read Cancel Apply Configuring client authentication on the server side The permissions in the Windows 2003 Service Pack 1 COM restrict remote calls that are not authenticated Complete Procedure 22 Configuring client authentication on the server side page 114 procedure to allow Telephony Manager 3 1 clients to authenticate to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server for client authentication to grant remote access launch and activation permissions to Anonymous Logon For more information refer to the following URL http support microsoft com kbid 892500 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 114 Windows Server 2003 configuration Procedure 22 Configuring client authentication on the server side Step Action 1 Click Start click Administrative Tools Component Services 2 Expand the Component Services Computers container 3 Right click My Computer click Properties see Figure 57 Component Services page 114 4 On the COM Security tab click Edit Limits in the Access Permissions see Figure 58 Com Security tab page 115 5 Add Anonymous to the list of user names and click Allow for Remote Access perm
180. he Software or related technical data or information to any military end user or for any military end use including the design development or production of any chemical nuclear or biological weapons 9 General If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the state of California Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement contact Nortel Networks Inc 2375 N Glenville Dr Richardson TX 75082 LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN NORTEL NETWORKS AND LICENSEE WHICH SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AND WRITTEN AGREEMENTS AND COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES PERTAINING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT NO DIFFERENT OR ADDITIONAL TERMS WILL BE ENFORCEABLE AGAINST NORTEL NETWORKS UNLESS NORTEL NETWORKS GIVES ITS EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING AN EXPRESS WAIVER OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT Revision History June 2009 Standard 01 07 This document is up issued to add an attention for the Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software procedure March 2008 Standard 01 06 This document is up issued add information to Upgrading to Telephony
181. henticated The selected method s are used to authenticate users on all Telephony Manager 3 1 platforms Telephony Manager 3 1 server Telephony Manager 3 1 client and Telephony Manager 3 1 Web client End Creating a user group Telephony Manager 3 1 allows the creation of User Groups to speed the process of adding users by accessing the Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator and certain Telephony Manager 3 1 Web based applications In the User Group Properties dialog box define most aspects of certain kinds of users such as their level of access to sites and systems and automatic connection to particular systems As many User Groups as required can be created Individual users are assigned to a User Group when adding users to the Telephony Manager 3 1 database There are two types of users local users and remote users Local users have accounts on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server When adding a new local user a Telephony Manager 3 1 user account and a local user account are created and the account is assigned to the specified User Group Deletion of a user removes the user account from the account list as well as from all relevant database tables Remote users have accounts that exist on a domain controller or in the CND For these users Telephony Manager 3 1 is used to assign the user ID for the account to a Telephony Manager 3 1 user group The logon names defined in Telephony Manager 3 1 must be unique for all users Access
182. hentication methods is selected Telephony Manager 3 1 respects the configured order however note that the best performance is achieved by using the Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account method 4 To use the SSL during the authentication process the Telephony Manager 3 1 server must have the required certificate installed as described in Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL page 85 I _ LLLLLLL Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 140 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users User groups Click the Use SSL for Web logon authentication check box after installing the certificate If the Telephony Manager 3 1 server has the required certificate installed selecting the check box causes Telephony Manager 3 1 to use SSL encrypted transport during authentication In this case Web logon is performed using https rather than http and the traffic is encrypted The Telephony Manager 3 1 server automatically switches to non SSL transport when the user is successfully authenticated 5 The selected method s are used to authenticate users on all Telephony Manager 3 1 platforms Telephony Manager 3 1 server Telephony Manager 3 1 client and Telephony Manager 3 1 Web client End For information about configuring users for desktop access see Enable Web desktop access in the CND Di
183. ian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Communication server 1000M Chassis CS 1000M Chassis Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 26 Overview e Communication server 1000M Chassis CS 1000M Cabinet The following systems are referred to generically as Large System e Meridian 1 PBX 51C e Meridian 1 PBX 61C e Meridian 1 PBX 81 e Meridian 1 PBX 81C e Communication server 1000M Half Group CS 1000M Half Group e Communication server 1000M Single Group CS 1000M Single Group e Communication server 1000M E Multi Group CS 1000M E Multi Group Systems that are referred to as CS 1000 Text In this document the following text conventions are used angle brackets lt gt Indicates that you must input some command text You choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is chg suppress alarm lt n gt where n is 0 all 1 minor 2 major 3 critical you enter chg suppress alarm 3 to suppress all alarms except critical alarms bold Indicates command names options and text Courier text Example Enter prt open alarm Italic text Indicates new terms book titles and variables in command syntax descriptions Where a variable is two or more words the w
184. ice extensions _ cus Cm coe Click Next The Select the Virtual Directories to Retain screen appears see Figure 86 Select the virtual directories to retain page 132 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 132 Windows Server 2003 configuration Figure 86 Select the virtual directories to retain Select the Virtual Directories to Retain AN The following legacy virtual directories pose a potential security risk and should be removed f 9 unneeded Select the vertual directories to retain on the selected server Learn more about retaining virtus drectories e 19 Click Next The Prevent anonymous users from accessing content files screen appears DO NOT place a check mark in the box called Deny anonymous users write access to content files see Figure 87 Prevent anonymous users from accessing content files page 132 Figure 87 Prevent anonymous users from accessing content files xi Prevent Anonymous Users from Accessing Content Files Increase the securky of your Web ske content by setting addtional restrictions for anonymous users You can improve the security of your Web site content by preventing anonymous users In addition to preventing access via IIS authentication settings you can deny write access to anonymous users with File system access contr
185. ides with ENMS the trap server is shared and both ENMS and Telephony Manager 3 1 receive and process all traps In this case the number of traps is multiplied and the trap server receives a large volume of traps which can cause the trap server to crash To prevent this you must modify the notification script on the coresident Telephony Manager 3 1 system so that traps are not forwarded to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The Telephony Manager 3 1 server must be set up to forward traps to Enterprise NMS Forwarded traps must be in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Open Alarm II format to be recognized The Telephony Manager 3 1 Alarm notification application forwards traps of interest to Enterprise NMS Sample scripts are provided with the Alarm Notification application which you can modify in the following ways to forward traps e Change the target IP to the address of the Enterprise NMS server e Select the severity of the traps that you want to forward Critical Major Minor e Modify the sample scripts to forward traps to Enterprise NMS Take care to translate the incoming trap to Telephony Manager 3 1 Open Alarm Il and set the proper device identification and error code fields These traps when received by Enterprise NMS result in a change of status of Telephony Manager 3 1 and can be viewed through the Fault Summary Removing a Telephony Manager 3 1 server Procedure 52 Removing a Telephony Manager 3 1 server Step Actio
186. ificantly unless the Telephony Manager 3 1 client and Telephony Manager 3 1 server are on the same LAN In general a WAN connection is not suitable Consult Appendix Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines page 257 in this Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements 33 document for further details on bandwidth and other network requirements for the Telephony Manager 3 1 client communicating with the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The appendix also provides information about the different network configurations that are possible The Web clients operate as thin clients connecting directly to a Web server running on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server All operations performed using a Web client are executed on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The Telephony Manager 3 1 server requires connectivity to the ELAN subnets of the systems managed Telephony Manager Windows and Web client require that an administrator account is logged onto the server at all times because the server uses the identity of the logged in user for access To allow Telephony Manager 3 1 client access without logging in to the server at all times see Procedure 69 Allowing Telephony Manager 3 1 client access without constant server log on optional page 246 for Windows 2000 Server and Window
187. ight 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 system performance 289 Figure 156 Example of LMHOSTS file part2 Ej Lmhosts Notepad of x Fie Edit Search Help The BEGIN_ and END_ALTERNATE keywords allow multiple INCLUDE statements to be grouped together Any single successful include will cause the group to succeed Finally non printing characters can be embedded in mappings by first surrounding the NetBIOS name in quotations then using the Oxnn notation to specify a hex value for a non printing character The following example illustrates all of these extensions 102 54 94 97 rhino PRE D0H networking net group s DC 102 54 94 102 appname 0x14 special app server 102 54 94 123 popular PRE source server 102 54 94 117 localsru PRE tineeded for the include BEGIN_ALTERNATE INCLUDE localsrv public lmhosts INCLUDE rhino public lmhosts SEND_ALTERNATE to later INCLUDE a centrally maintained lmhosts file if the localsru system is unavailable Note that the whole file is parsed including comments on each lookup so keeping the number of comments to a minimun will improve performance Therefore it is not advisable to simply add lmhosts file entries onto the end of this file 102 54 94 123 otnserver1 PRE OTM server 3 Save the file as LMHOSTS The filename is LMHOSTS with no extension End LMHOSTS is normally used for smaller netwo
188. ights for Web applications before any users from that group can log on While assigning access permissions be certain to select the top level application for every sub application assigned For example if System Alarms is selected Equipment must also be selected Failure to do so can result in members of the user group denied access to the Web site Telephony Manager 3 1 Web application access permissions are controlled by the Administrator on a per user group basis For example the administrator may limit the Telephony Manager 3 1 users access to only some of the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web based functionality The Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Navigator controls access to applications by shielding Web links that the user does not have access to The directories and files comprising those applications are similarly protected Users log on to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Navigator using their Microsoft Windows userID and password logon security for Telephony Manager 3 1 Web services ensures protection against unauthorized entry and enforces access permissions for logged on users Access to Web applications applies to a group not to individual users To change the security access for individual users their group membership should be changed For information about setting user access refer to User groups page 164 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2
189. igured in the upper section of this dialog box are applicable to all of the tabs in telephone pages These options include Allowing or denying this group the ability to synchronize changes with the system If synchronization is denied the changes must be manually synchronized with the system using Station Administration e Determining whether the troubleshooting link appears at the top of the telephone page for members of this group Allowing or denying this group the ability to restore changes made to a telephone Procedure 25 Configuring telephone access options Step Action 1 Select Allow user to synchronize changes check box 2 Select Show Trouble Shooting link check box to enable this option For EndUsers clicking the link appears the Telephone Troubleshooting Help page which includes a reset button For Web users clicking the link appears the maintenance page for the telephone with all of the available commands 3 Select Allow users to restore pending changes check box to permit the users in this group to restore the changes made to a telephone 4 Click Apply End Keys tab In the Keys tab see Figure 92 Telephone access properties dialog box Keys tab page 145 the check box and lists of key based features can be used to determine whether the Telephone Keys page appears and if so which keys the users in this group can change Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installatio
190. in the Add Object Palette dialog box See Figure 125 Add Object Palette dialog box page 220 Figure 125 Add Object Palette dialog box Add Object Palette Symbol Classes Drag a Subclass Symbol to the desired Submap Close Help Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 221 4 Select and drag the standard WindowsNT icon from the Symbol Subclasses See Figure 126 Add Object Palette dialog box II page 221 onto the appropriate location on the Network Map The Add Object dialog box appears Figure 126 Add Object Palette dialog box II Computer Connector 5 Fill in the Label field Telephony Manager 3 1 server A in this example See Figure 127 Add Object dialog box page 222 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 222 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Figure 127 Add Object dialog box OTM Server Capabilities SeLUBIEStAtIOULeS General Attributes IP Map OTM Server 4 6 Select IP Map under Object Attributes and click Set Object Attributes See Figure 128 Add Object IP Map page 223 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manaa 3 1 Installat
191. in2K Telep Telep Telep Telep Telepho server hony hony hony hony ny Man English Manager Manag Manag Manag ager 3 1 Locale 3 1 er 3 1 er 3 1 er 3 1 English Win2K server French Locale English German Win2K Telepho server ny Man German ager 3 1 Locale Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks FTP Server configuration 295 Telephony Manager 3 1 Languages supported for English and Regional OS client language locale should be set to the language in which Telephony Manager 3 1 is to be run client Regional OS server OS amp Japane Locale English se Win2K XP Pro Japanese English Win2K Telep or 2003 hony server Manager 3 1 Simplified English Chinese Telepho Win2K or 2003 ny Man server ager 3 1 English English English English English English English Standalone Telep Telep Telep Telepho Telep or Fren or Ger machine hony hony hony ny Man hony ch Tel man Tel no Telephony Manager Manag Manager ager 3 1 Manag ephony ephony Manager 3 1 3 1 er 3 1 3 1 er 3 1 Manag Manage client er 3 1 r 3 1 FTP Server configuration Telephony Manager 3 1 uses the FTP service from Microsoft Internet Information Server The correct Telephony Manager 3 1 Server IP address and FTP user account information must be configure
192. inst unauthorized entry and enforces access permissions for logged on users CND authentication is the only supported authentication method for Desktop Services End Users All 3 authentication methods local domain and CND are supported in both Windows and Web administrator logon There are three categories of users e Administrators Telephony Manager 3 1 administrators e HelpDesk Telephony Manager 3 1 Help desk users EndUser Telephony Manager 3 1 end users In addition there is a Default user category Default users can successfully log on to the Web but they do not have an access profile defined in their Directory record Telephony Manager 3 1 administrators and Help desk users have user accounts in a Windows domain End users must have accounts either in a Windows domain or through an CND server Telephony Manager 3 1 administrators must be set up in a Windows Administrator group on the server itself not on a remote computer Telephony Manager 3 1 administrators and Help desk users can access and change their own telephones through either the Web or the Desktop Services end user pages Access to the end user pages requires the appropriate CND Directory setup user logon and user group for these administrators and Help desk users Telephony Manager 3 1 Web application access permissions are controlled by the administrator on a per Windows user group basis For example the administrator can limit the Telephony Ma
193. installed Ethernet connections Release 24B or later for Data Buffering and Access IOP IOP CMDU or IODU C cards for Meridian 1 PBX 51C 61C 81 or 81C Ethernet AUI cables to be attached to each IOP Meridian 1 PBX 51C 61C 81 or 81C NTDK27 Ethernet cable for Meridian 1 PBX 11C CA Transceivers to connect to the LAN Router Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 298 Appendix B Installation checklist PPP connections Hayes compatible modem SDI port available on the system configured for SCH only Serial cable to connect the modem to the SDI port Serial connections SDI port available on the switch configured for SCH only Hayes compatible modem for remote connection optional Serial cable to connect the modem to the SDI port Programming the switch Enable Name Option in LD 17 Define Limited Access Password in LD 17 For Serial communication Configure a TTY with User SCH in LD 17 For Ethernet or PPP communication Configure a pseudo TTY PTY with User SCH MTC BUG in LD 17 Configure Ethernet at the switch in LD 117 Define the Gateway router IP address on the switch in LD 117 Configure PPP at the switch in LD 117 INIT the switch Enable the new IP address defined in LD 117 in LD 137 Enable Databa
194. ion Layer Gateway S Manual Disabled Internet Connection St Application Management Manual Disabled Application installation Background Intelligent Transf Manual Automatic SMS Management Point Computer Browser Automatic Disabled SMS Logon Point Brow Distributed File System Manual Disabled DFS server Domain co File Replication Manual Disabled Domain controler Acti IPSec Services Automatic Disabled IPsec Services Net Logon Manual Disabled Domain controler Acti Network Location Awareness Manual Disabled Domain controler sal gt A To undo any of the above changes go back to the previous pages and change the selection listed in the Used By column coe Fie oen 11 Click Next The Network security window appears see Figure 79 Network security page 127 DO NOT place a check mark in the Skip this section check box Figure 79 Network security Security Configuration Wizard p x Network Security Use this section to configure inbound ports using Windows Firewall based on the roles and administration options that you selected In addition you can restrict access to ports and indicate if port traffic is signed or encrypted using Internet Protocol Security IPsec A Answering these questions incorrectly might prevert the selected server From communicating with other computers If you skip this section this security policy will not configure Windows Firewal or IPsec settings IF you do not skip
195. ion and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 223 Figure 128 Add Object IP Map OTM ServerA 9 2 OTM Server l 7 Select and enter the Hostname IP Address and Subnet Mask See Figure 129 Add Object Set Attributes dialog box page 224 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 224 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Figure 129 Add Object Set Attributes dialog box ar alue Hostname pmpkzs5 engwest baynetworks com IP Address 134 177 222 127 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Physical Address 8 Click OK You are returned to the Add Object dialog box In the Selection Name field enter the same value as that of the Hostname in the previous step pmpkzs5 engwest baynetworks com in this example See Figure 130 Add Object Selection Name page 225 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 225 Figure 130 Add Object Selection Name 7 Meven O O OOO 9 Click OK The object is created on the Network Map CAUTION Service Interruption The value for Hostname must
196. ion and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 227 I LL ee Figure 133 Symbol Properties dialog box bs User riane e Appicaicn iste End The Management URL can also be configured to access the Telephony Manager 3 1 server See Figure 134 Object Properties dialog box page 228 and Figure 135 Attributes for Object dialog box page 229 For an object on the Network Map under General Attributes in the Object Properties dialog box follow the procedure Procedure 57 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server Access page 228 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 228 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Procedure 57 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server Access Step Action 1 Enter the address IP address or the DNS name of the Telephony Manager 3 1 server in the ManagementURL field 2 Set isHTTPSupported to True Figure 134 Object Properties dialog box Nam pmpkzs5 engwest baynetworks com Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 229 Figure 135 Attributes for Ob
197. ired Supports one USB dongle only USB dongles are not supported through a USB hub Required Required Required Required 1 56K BPS recommende d Required Required Not required Required Required Note 1 Telephony Manager 3 1 is supported on Intel Xeon CPU or Hyper threading configurations Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 36 Preparing for installation Note 2 An Ethernet Network Interface Card is required to support connection with the Meridian 1 using Ethernet A second Ethernet Network Interface Card is optional depending on configuration Note 3 For external modems or direct connection the PC must have an available serial port that is one not used by a mouse or other serial device The number of on board PC COM ports required depends on the number of external modems or direct connections required Telephony Manager 3 1 software requirements Novell The Telephony Manager 3 1 server is not supported on a Novell server TCP IP communication is supported IPX SPX communication is not supported General restrictions The following general restrictions apply to Telephony Manager 3 1 e The user is responsible to ensure that selection of Signaling server present check box is completed Telephony Manager 3 1 cannot automatically determine if a system has a signa
198. is event c Event Log Message Enter the following default text Telephony Manager 3 1 event o enterprise e generic G specific S args The displayed message shows the contents of the event message See Table 12 Legend for variables in the Event Log Message page 217 for other variables You are allowed to display any message that you choose in the Alarm Browser End The following table provides the legend for variables in the Event Log Message Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installation and configuration 217 Table 12 Legend for variables in the Event Log Message o Print the name object identifier of the received event as a string of numbers e Print the trap enterprise as an Object ID string of numbers This number is implied by the event object identifier for non SNMPv1 events G Print the trap s generic trap number This number is implied by the event object identifier for non SNMPv1 events S Print the trap s specific trap number This number is implied by the event object identifier for non SNMPv1 events Print the number of attributes in the event Print all the attributes as seq name type value strings where seq is the attribute sequence number If you also want the color of the object on the map to change to reflect the oc
199. issioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 78 Performing a keycode upgrade Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Performing migrations Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Upgrades and migration page 79 Operating system migration page 80 Upgrades and migration ATTENTION Direct upgrades are not supported for customers migrating from OTM releases prior to 2 2 A two step upgrade is required first to OTM 2 2 and then to Telephony Manager 3 1 Upgrade from MAT to Telephony Manager 3 1 is not supported The upgrade must be done as a new purchase and a new install Custom reports created in OTM 2 2 are lost after migration to Telephony Manager 3 1 The Telephony Manager 3 1 Corporate Directory does not support customized reports Windows Server 2003 migration Direct migration is not supported in Windows Server 2003 To migrate from Windows 2000 Server OTM 2 2 to Windows Server 2003 Telephony Manager 3 1 you must first upgrade from OTM 2 2 to Telephony Manager 3 1 on the Windows 2000 Server system The database migration utility then migrates all data to Telephony Manager 3 1 Complete the following steps to perform this migration Perform a full backup of the Telephony Manager 3 1
200. issioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Adding auser 173 Table 11 Access privilege icons Ey Read and write access Read only access No access Indicates that the access privileges in the branch are mixed between one or more of the above levels 4 Enter values in the User ID and Password text boxes to allow this class of user to connect to this system without having to enter a User ID and Password each time for connection If the Administrator wants to use the Web Maintenance Pages these fields must be completed in the Administrators User Group properties 5 Click OK to save changes and close the User Group Properties dialog box End Adding a user The Administrator user account for the Windows 2000 OS does not appear in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Users window This is to prevent users from changing the Administrator account password from within Telephony Manager 3 1 Even though it is not listed in the Users window the OS Administrator account can always be used to log on to Telephony Manager 3 1 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 174 Security Management Procedure 40 Adding a user Step Action 1 In the Telephony Manager 3 1 Users window choose Configuration gt Add User The New User Properties
201. issions see Figure 59 Access Permissions page 115 6 Click OK to accept the change 7 On the COM Security tab click Edit Limits in the Launch and Activation Permissions area see Figure 58 Com Security tab page 115 8 Add Anonymous to the list of user names and click Allow for Remote Launch and Activation permissions see Figure 60 Launch Permission page 116 9 Click OK to accept the change see Figure 60 Launch Permission page 116 Figure 57 esa doable Services moji Eile Action yew window Help p le om xe he nhng as B m COM DCOM Config Distributed Transacti prunes 5 C Runni E G Active Directory New Window from Here Event Viewer Loc Servies Local a 4 Opens property sheet for the current selection j f Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 115 Figure 58 Com Security tab My Computer Properties Figure 59 Access Permissions Access Permission ANONYMOUS LOGON Distributed COM Users BROBIN R18 Distributed COM Use a Everyone Intenet Guest Account BROBIN R18 IUSR_BROBIN A18 Launch IIS Process Account BROBIN R18 IWAM_BROBI Local Access Remote Access Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation
202. it Remove Default gateways Gateway Metric Interface metric fi cae 5 In the IP Settings tab modify the Interface Metric value to a value greater than that of the Nortel server Subnet network interface Click OK to save all changes 6 Alter the binding order of the Nortel server Subnet network interface to a number one position by completing the following procedure a Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel b Double click Network and Dial up Connections c On the Advanced menu click Advanced Settings The Connections box appears the network adapters d Select the Nortel server Subnet network interface adapter e Use the arrows on the right side of the box to move the adapter ahead higher than of the ELAN network interface adapter if necessary and then click OK f If you are prompted to restart the computer click Yes 7 Ensure that all changes are saved and the server restarted When the server restarts check that all settings are applied Launch a command prompt window and check the routing table using the route print command The interface metric value has changed End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Network Adapter software 251 Installing a modem Procedure 73 Installing a modem on a Windows server
203. itial logon Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 179 Setting up the CND server and Terminal server CND server The CND allows you to link and synchronize data in the Telephony Manager 3 1 CND and supported Corporate LDAP directories Telephony Manager 3 1 acts as a client to the CND e If CND is installed on the same server as Telephony Manager 3 1 then all properties were preconfigured and no changes are required e If CND is installed on a different PC from the Telephony Manager 3 1 server the IP address of the CND server must be entered in the CND server setup dialog box e If the default Telephony Manager 3 1 account password is changed from CND Manager the password value must be updated in the CND server setup dialog box e If Telephony Manager clients need to access CND data CND setup on their Telephony Manager server must be configured with the Computer name host name or IP address of the CND server not localhost even though the CND server is installed on the same server as Telephony Manager 3 1 server This is configured manually after installing the Telephony Manager 3 1 server For detailed instructions on setting up the CND server as well as an example of importing attributes to the CND Directory see Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101
204. ject dialog box Unset True False pmpkzs5 engwest baynetworks com False isSNMPSupported isSNMPProxied isRDM Supported False End Telephony Manager 3 1 configuration Telephony Manager 3 1 PC Refer to the Alarm Management section in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 for information about configuring the Telephony Manager 3 1 server to forward SNMP traps to HP OV NNM or other remote systems Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 230 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 231 Converting Systems in Telephony Manager Contents Overview This chapter contains information about converting the following Procedure 58 Converting a CS 1000S to CS 1000E CPPM page 232 Procedure 59 Converting a CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis to CS 1000E CPPM page 232 Procedure 60 Converting a Meridian 1 system to CS 1000M E system page 233 Procedure 61 Converting a Branch Media gateway CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis system to CS 1000E CPPM page 233 This chapter contains information about how to convert systems in Telephony Manager 3 1 There is no automatic conversion utility
205. k Switch alarm details Under normal conditions a system generates one trap approximately every ten seconds Beginning with X11 Release 25 you can use filtering on the system to reduce the output of traps However there is no filtering capability on IP Line IP Trunk IP Line IP Trunk does not generate traps under normal operating conditions In an abnormal situation IP Line IP Trunk could be expected to generate an alarm every 5 seconds IP Line IP Trunk may generate a large number of alarms when Quality of Service QoS monitoring is enabled When QoS monitoring is enabled an alarm is raised or cleared for every QoS threshold crossing excellent good or fair per codec A network with varying QoS has many threshold crossings resulting in a large number of alarms Recommended usage For bandwidth and processing reasons alarm traffic should be minimized If alarms from the switch are sent to Telephony Manager 3 1 use filtering to limit the traffic to only important alarms Because it is unlikely that multiple Voice Gateway Media cards simultaneously exhibit problems the alarms generated by Voice Gateway Media cards should not create traffic problems To limit alarm traffic Nortel recommends that you not enable Network QoS Monitoring Changes to IPLine IP Trunk to allow filtering helps this situation The incoming rate of alarms must match the handling capabilities of the Telephony Manager 3 1 configuration Nortel Communication Server 10
206. ks Index 307 Features tab 146 General tab 144 Keys tab 144 Telephone Manager 272 creating 170 deleting 167 properties 142 user groups 157 Telephony Manager 3 1 administrators 136 User Groups 164 Telephony Manager 3 1 Client License 91 Telephony Manager 3 1 Directory 148 Telephony Manager 3 1 Help desk users 136 Telephony Manager 3 1 Server 194 user management 162 166 users Default 136 Telephony Manager 3 1 administra tors 136 Telephony Manager 3 1 Status Monitor 218 Telephony Manager 3 1 Help desk 136 Telephony Managers folder 194 Terminal server 179 Terminal Server 182 test connection 94 network cards 253 TN license 89 troubleshooting modem connections 151 U uninstall Telephony Manager 235 user adding 173 authentication 168 175 configuring 167 restricting access 167 user authentication 160 user group 168 V virtual ports 181 Virtual System Terminal Web 184 W Web reporting role 148 Web Virtual System Terminal 184 Windows 2000 installing 243 setup program 243 243 Windows NT component installation 244 network adapter software installation 246 X X11 packages 297 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 308 Index Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 200
207. ks from thes dives and then click Finish to complete setup Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager will not install or upgrade e launch the Common Network Directory nti Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 60 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 61 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software Contents Overview This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview page 61 Installing the client software page 64 This chapter contains information about installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software Telephony Manager 3 1 client software installation is similar to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server installation The steps are summarized in this chapter CAUTION Installing Telephony Manager from the desktop or from a folder that has a longer path name will cause unexpected error messages during the Telephony Manager Server or Telephony Manager Client installation To install the program from a hard drive instead of from a CD create a folder in the root of the drive and name it CD Copy the contents of the CD or unzip the files from the archive into this folder Run the
208. l users are assigned to a user group when users are added to the Telephony Manager 3 1 database There are two types of users local users and remote users Local users have accounts on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server When adding a new local user an Telephony Manager 3 1 user account and a local Windows user account are created and the account is assigned to the specified user group Deletion of a user removes the user account from the account list in Windows as well as from all relevant database tables Remote users have accounts that exist on a domain controller or in the CND For these users Telephony Manager 3 1 is used to assign the logon name for the account to a Telephony Manager 3 1 user group The logon names defined in Telephony Manager 3 1 must be unique for all users Access to Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows and Web applications is provided through the Windows server A Windows domain account or the CND can also be used to authenticate Telephony Manager 3 1 users for Web Services See Web Navigator in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 6071 Deleting a user group A user group can be deleted only after all associated members of that group are either deleted or reassigned to another user group The account used when logging in to your current session cannot be deleted Restricting user access permission levels A user can be restricted from having access to sites systems and applications However when a
209. lephony Manager 3 1 PC for example server but no Telephony Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 280 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Manager 3 1 clients that requires access to the ELAN subnet Note that if multiple systems are managed the ELAN Network interface on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server or Telephony Manager 3 1 client only allows access to a single ELAN subnet and the other ELAN subnets have to be accessed by a routed connection from the Nortel server subnet Telephony Manager 3 1 clients that also serve as desktop PCs generally have a routed connection to the ELAN subnets of the managed systems because they are located on the client subnet In making the decision regarding which configuration to choose a factor is whether a routed connection to the ELAN subnet is required for other purposes for example the CS 1000 Call Servers send traps directly to an NMS ELAN and Nortel server subnet connectivity requirements Connectivity from the Telephony Manager 3 1 server or client to the ELAN is required for the following operations e All system management configuration and maintenance of Meridian 1 and CS 1000 devices Several protocols may be used for example Rlogon SNMP e Access is required from the Telephony Manager 3 1 server client to the signaling s
210. lephony Manager software each of which is referred to as Software in this Agreement BY COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE TERMS EXPRESSED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY TERMS UNDER WHICH NORTEL NETWORKS WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the product unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price 1 License grant Nortel Networks Inc Nortel Networks grants the end user of the Software Licensee a personal nonexclusive license a to use the Software either on a single computer or if applicable on a single authorized device identified by host ID b to copy the Software solely for backup purposes in support of authorized use of the Software and c to use and copy the associated user manual solely in support of authorized use of the Software by Licensee This license applies to the Software only and does not extend to Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products are licensed for use under the terms of the applicable Nortel Networks Inc Software License Agreement that accompanies such software and upon payment by the end user of the applicable license fees for such software 2 Restrictions on use reservation of rights The Software and us
211. less of whether or not they are accessible to each other Procedure 62 Uninstalling Telephony Manager Server with no clients associated Step Action 1 Select the Uninstall radio button from the Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard as shown in Figure 138 Telephony Manager InstallShield wizard page 238 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 238 Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 2 3 Figure 138 Telephony Manager InstallShield wizard Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Welcome If no clients are associated prior to uninstallation of the Telephony Manager Server a confirmation message displays as seen in Figure 139 Telephony Manager Server uninstall confirmation no client page 238 Figure 139 Telephony Manager Server uninstall confirmation no client Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Click Yes to continue the Telephony Manager Server uninstallation Click No to cancel the uninstallation End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 239 Procedure 63 Uninstalling Telephony Manager Server with clients associated Step Action 1 Select the
212. ling server e For CS 1000M Cabinet and CS 1000M Chassis systems both appear in Telephony Manager 3 1 as a Communication Server 1000M Cabinet Chassis Existing fields are used to differentiate the hardware The user can name the system to reflect the hardware when adding the system add information into the comments field to describe the hardware e The Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Option 11C Mini system appears in Telephony Manager 3 1 as a Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Option 11C system after the update system data operation It is the user s responsibility to select the proper machine type in the system properties page e Inthe System Data tab those systems with Signaling server present that is Signaling server present checkbox in Network Tab is selected cannot be downgraded to non CS 1000 software releases for example X11 Release 25 37 The applicable releases displayed in the release combo box is based on the Machine Type and for the CS 1000 machine types only CS 1000 releases are applicable e The Signaling server present check box must be cleared to downgrade the system to non CS 1000 software releases e Ifa Meridian 1 system running CS 1000 Release 4 0 in Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator connects to a system running X11 release Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3
213. link under Support on the Nortel home page www nortel com Applicable systems This document applies to the following systems e Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis e Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet e Meridian 1 PBX 51C e Meridian 1 PBX 61C e Meridian 1 PBX 81 e Meridian 1 PBX 81C e Communication server 1000S CS 1000S e Communication server 1000M Chassis CS 1000M Chassis e Communication server 1000M Cabinet CS 1000M Cabinet e Communication server 1000M Half Group CS 1000M Half Group e Communication server 1000M Single Group CS 1000M Single Group e Communication server 1000M E Multi Group CS 1000M E Multi Group e Communication server 1000E CPPM CS 1000E CPPM Take note that when upgrading software memory upgrades can be required on the Signaling Server the Call Server or both System migration After particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 Release 4 0 software and configured to include a signaling server they become CS 1000M E systems Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M E systems page 24 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000M E system Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M E systems Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet Meridian 1 PBX 51C Meridian 1 PBX 61C CS 1000M Half Group CS 1000M Single Group Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyrigh
214. ll as configures sudting and registry settings This wizard detects the inbound ports that are listened to by this server Before continuing make sure that all applications that use inbound ports are running This wizard does not install components or set up a server to perform specific roles To do this run the Configure Your Server Wizard To continue click Next Learn more about Secrty Configuration Wizard 2 The Configuration Action window appears see Figure 64 Create a new security policy page 119 Select Create a new security policy Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 119 Figure 64 Create a new security policy Txi Configuration Action IN You can create a new security polcy edt or apply an existing security policy or rolback the last applied security policy 3 Click Next The Select Server window appears see Figure 65 Select a server page 119 Select or enter a server name Click Next Figure 65 Select a server Select Server The configuration of the server you select wil be used as a baseline for this security policy The Processing Security Configuration Database screen appears see Figure 66 Processing security configuration database page 120 Nortel Communication Server
215. ll interrupted Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete iterrupted before Nortel CS 1000 Tel a et could be completely The system has not been modified To install this program at a later time run the installation again Click Finish to ext the wizard 11 Upon completion the installation Wizard Complete screen appears prompting the installer to restart the PC now or at a later time See Figure 34 Installation Wizard Complete page 72 Figure 34 Installation Wizard Complete Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete 10 Telephony Manage Yes want to restart my computer now No wil restart my computer later Remove any disks from their dives and then chok Finish to complete setup Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing the client software 73 End pcAnywhere uninstallation When pcAnywhere version 11 0 is installed on a system and later it is uninstalled DCOM service is disabled by the uninstall process Telephony Manager 3 1 logon will fail To enable Telephony Manager 3 1 logon complete the following procedure When the pcAnywhere version 11 0 is uninstalled re enable the DCOM service Procedure 5 Re enabling the DCOM service Step Action 1 Go to
216. llation application is flexible permitting uninstallation of both Telephony Manager Client and Telephony Manager Server separately when they are not accessible to each other Previously the user could uninstall the Telephony Manager Server when there were no clients and uninstall the Telephony Manager Client prior to uninstalling the Telephony Manager Server The enhanced installation application permits the additional uninstallation situations e The Telephony Manager 3 1 Server can be uninstalled prior to uninstalling the Telephony Manager Clients e The Telephony Manager Client can be uninstalled when the Telephony Manager Server is not accessible or is already uninstalled Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 When the Telephony Manager Client and Telephony Manager Server are not accessible to each other uninstallation of either can be performed Maintenance mode With Telephony Manager 3 1 successfully installed run Setup exe from the installation CD ROM to enter the InstallShield Wizard Maintenance mode see Figure 136 Maintenance mode page 236 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 236 Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 Figure 136 Maintenance mode Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Welcome Modify repar ot remove the program o the Nortel CS 1
217. lorer menu bar select Tools gt Internet Options gt Security gt Trusted Sites click Sites and then add server IP address to trusted site End Accessing the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server from a Web browser Procedure 42 Accessing the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server from a Web browser Step Action 1 Enter the Telephony Manager 3 1 server IP address or computer name in the location bar of the Web browser on the PC client To access the Telephony Manager Administrator page enter http lt tmserver hostname gt admin 2 Press Enter End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 187 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview page 188 Integration requirements page 188 Telephony Manager 3 1 ENMS integration page 189 Telephony Manager OIT files page 190 Checklist for installing the Optivity Integration Toolkit page 190 About oitlnstall page 191 Using ENMS InfoCenter page 192 Viewing Telephony Manager 3 1 server object properties page 196 Modifying Telephony Manager 3 1 server object properties page 197 Starting Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications page 197 Using FaultSummary page 200 Configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 page 203
218. lug in This operation is similar to the standard download operations in that the user must download the plug in to the user s hard disk and then it installs itself onto the computer The plug in check is performed the first time the application is launched Default URL The default Telephony Manager 3 1 URL is the end user logon page To navigate to the administrator logon page place admin after the Telephony Manager 3 1 IP address or host name Example http TM 3 1 IP address or host name admin Access permissions When Telephony Manager 3 1 starts for the first time the Administrator profile is the only active profile Access permissions for the other Windows XP or Windows 2000 Groups that have been set up on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server must be assigned Administrator Group access permissions Persons belonging to the Administrators user group on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server can log on to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web site and get unrestricted access The Administrators group has unrestricted access by default Access permissions for the Administrators user group cannot be altered French or German OS Administrator groups Important advice for localized OS The name of the administrators user group in the French and German operating systems is not Administrators These names are localized by Microsoft in the regional operating system software In a default French installation the local administrators user group is Admini
219. marks The base port can be changed from 4789 Microsoft Default Port RPC SCM used by DCOM Meridian 1 or Communication server 1000 sending to Telephony Manager 3 1 Telephony Manager 3 1 Protocol Type Component Alarm Traps LD 117 Maintenance window DBA 1 port per session Start from 1929 till 2057 2058 and onward is used as Data ports till 2185 Telephony Manager 3 1 DECT Remarks Microsoft Default Port Using netstat command Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 294 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Telephony Manager 3 1 language support Telephony Manager 3 1 supports the following language configurations Telephony Manager 3 1 Languages supported for English and Regional OS client language locale should be set to the language in which Telephony Manager 3 1 is to be run client Regional OS server OS amp Locale English WinXP Win2K i Win2K Pro Pro IXP Pro English English English English i English Win2003 Telep Telep Telep Telep server hony hony hony hony English Manager Manag Manag Manag Locale 3 1 er 3 1 er 3 1 er 3 1 English Win2003 server French Locale English German Win2003 Telepho server ny Man German ager 3 1 Locale English English English English English English W
220. n 1 In InfoCenter open a folder in the Folders pane 2 Select the Telephony Manager 3 1 server that you want to delete Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 204 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS 3 From the InfoCenter menu bar choose File gt Delete This action deletes the object from ENMS End Troubleshooting If you do not see the OITHOME environment variable you must manually set it before installing Telephony Manager 3 1 or manually running oitInstall to update the Enterprise NMS database If you do not see Managementserver type and Telephony Manager sub type on the Device Add panel e Check to see if the OITHOME variable was set e Check to see if the Telephony Manager 3 1 OIT files are present and in the correct folder e Check the oitInstall log file to verify that the Telephony Manager 3 1 entries were updated e You need to run oitlnstall again If you cannot see the Telephony Manager 3 1 server that you have added e Check the View Properties of the folder to verify that it can display Telephony Manager 3 1 servers If you cannot launch or connect to Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications e Verify that the IP Address of the Telephony Manager 3 1 server entered in InfoCenter is correct e Verify that the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web server is running
221. n Microsoft Windows Server 2003 IIS 5 0 isolation mode and worker process isolation mode The default isolation mode of IIS 6 0 in Windows 2003 is worker process Telephony Manager 3 1 has characteristics that conflict with the worker process isolation mode therefore IIS needs to be configured to run in IIS 5 0 isolation mode After completing the following procedure you must restart the WWW service which temporarily interrupts the service Procedure 20 Configuring IIS 5 0 isolation mode Step Action 1 In IIS Manager expand the local computer right click Web Sites and then click Properties 2 Click the Service tab select the Run WWW service in IIS 5 0 isolation mode check box and then click OK see Figure 53 Run in IIS 5 0 isolation mode page 109 3 To restart the WWW service click Yes Figure 53 Run in IIS 5 0 isolation mode Web Site Performance ISAPI Filters Home Directory Documents Directory Security HTTP Headers Custom Errors Service M Isolation mode HTTP compression I Compress application files I Compress static files um temporary directo Unlimited Limited to in megabytes l 95 Cancel Apply Help Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 110 Windows Server 2003 configuration End Adjusting Inter
222. n Server 1000 ENMS 10 4 CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Application Builder Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client Remote Gateway 9100 series Configuration Mgr previously known as Remote Office 1 5 2 1 6 0 1 7 PC Anywhere 11 5 Timbuktu Pro 7 8 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard amp professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan 9 0 NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Concord Edge Agent 5 7 ENMS 10 4 CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Application Builder Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client Remote Gateway 9100 series Configuration Mgr previously known as Remote Office 1 5 2 1 6 0 1 7 PC Anywhere 11 5 Timbuktu Pro 7 8 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard amp professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan 9 0 NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Concord Edge Agent 5 7 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Software limits 263 Windows 2000 Professional in Japanese Windows 2000 Professional in Simplified Chinese IE 6 Japanes e IE 6 Simplifie d Chinese Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in Japanese Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in Simplified Chinese 3 1 English client or standalone 3 1 English client or standalone Nortel Communication Server 1000 ENMS 10 4 CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Application Builder Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client Remote Gateway 9100 series Configuration Mgr previously know
223. n and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks User groups 145 Figure 92 Telephone access properties dialog box Keys tab Name Last Modified Number of Users Default 12 8 2001 3 58 45 PM 0 Navigator Telephone a General Properties No Access izj Show Trouble Shooting link Directory Options No Access x Allow user to restore pending changes Keys No Access x Allow user to synchronize changes Features No Access izi Administration No Access zj Keys Features Keys that can be changed Keys that cannot be changed AAG ACD Answer Agent AAK Automatic Answer Bao Move gt gt ACD Auto Call Distribution ACNT ACDD Account Code ronson eit ADL Auto Dial AEFD Alternate External Fle AEHT Alternate External Hui AFD Alternate Flexible Call F lt lt Move AGR Agent X Key X T lt lt Movesa Telephone Profile data retrieved successfully OK Cancel Apply Help Java Applet Window Procedure 26 Configuring the Telephone Keys page Step Action 1 Go to the Telephone Keys page 2 Use the Move and Move All buttons to move the key based features that this user group can change into the left column By putting keys into the left column users in this group can interchange these key types and change the key parameters If the user selects a key that is not in the left hand column while viewing the Tel
224. n as Remote Office 1 5 2 1 6 0 1 7 PC Anywhere 11 5 Timbuktu Pro 7 8 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard amp professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan 9 0 NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Concord Edge Agent 5 7 ENMS 10 4 CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Application Builder Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client Remote Gateway 9100 series Configuration Mgr previously known as Remote Office 1 5 2 1 6 0 1 7 PC Anywhere 11 5 Timbuktu Pro 7 8 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard amp professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan 9 0 NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Concord Edge Agent 5 7 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 264 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Windows 2000 Professional in Spanish Windows 2000 Professional in Brazilian Portug uese IE 6 Spanish IE 6 Brazilian Portuguese Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in Spanish Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in Brazilian P ortuguese 3 1 English client or standalone 3 1 English client or standalone Nortel Communication Server 1000 ENMS 10 4 CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Application Builder Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client Remote Gateway 9100 series Configuration Mgr previously known as Remote Office 1 5 2 1 6 0 1 7 PC Anywhere 11 5 Timbuktu Pro 7 8 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivi
225. n belong to other groups but if they belong to the Administrators group the Administrators profile overrides all other profiles While assigning access permissions be certain that the top level application for every sub application assigned is selected For example if selecting System Alarms Equipment must also be selected Failure to do so can result in members of the user group denied access to the Web site User authentication One of the following methods can be selected to authenticate Telephony Manager 3 1 users e Local server account e Windows domain account e CND authentication The Administrator account is always authenticated through the local server account because it is a default account on all supported Windows platforms The default authentication method is the Local Telephony Manager 3 1 server account This method provides the best logon performance because there is no requirement to search the CND Directory for the user s assigned User Group Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks User authentication 139 Procedure 24 Configuring authentication Step Action To configure authentication 1 Under Web Administration in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web tree select User Authentication The User Authentication page appears See Figure 89 User Authentication page page 1
226. nager 3 1 user s access to only some of the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web based functionality The Telephony Manager 3 1 Web controls access to applications by shielding Web links to which the user does not have access The directories and files comprising those applications are similarly protected Configure Windows 2000 user groups and individual users using the Windows user interface on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and then determine the access permissions for each user group by using the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web page For information about setting user access refer to User groups page 140 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Access permissions 137 Precaution As a security precaution with any upgrade or reinstallation of Telephony Manager 3 1 software access profiles for all user groups except Administrator are reset Any member of the Administrator user group can log on and set up access profiles for members of the HelpDesk end user and default plug ins Plug ins When an administrator or HelpDesk user first points a browser to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator Web site a check is performed to see if the user has the required Telephony Manager 3 1 Java plug in If the plug in is not installed the administrator or Help desk user is given the option of downloading and installing the p
227. nd the dial up attempt is aborted To change the factory INIT string to use verbal V1 result code follow the steps in Procedure 29 Changing the factory INIT string page 150 Procedure 29 Changing the factory INIT string Step Action 1 From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel gt Phones and Modems gt Properties gt Advanced 2 Type in the appropriate INIT string End Configuring high speed smart modems As modem technology progresses the new generation of high speed modems provides additional functionality to achieve the highest possible connection rate These high speed smart modems use various tones during the handshaking period to negotiate the speed and protocol SDI port The modem configured on the SDI port needs extra attention In most cases the modem attached to the SDI port is configured to run in dumb mode at the same speed for which the system SDI port is configured at 9600 bps or less This locks the modem into a specific mode of operation preventing it from running in command mode echo input or from connecting at a different baud rate than is configured for the system SDI port Prevent lockup When a high speed smart modem is used on the Telephony Manager 3 1 PC to dial up the system modem the PC modem always attempts to connect at its highest possible speed The system s modem however can only connect at the configured speed Therefore during the modem online handshaking period
228. nects and the scripting is completed successfully but the Connection Details button reveals that the session failed WARNING Disabling the shells in LD 117 will cause telephony applications on external devices to stop communicating with the PBX Procedure 35 Resolving a failed session Step Action 1 Verify that the IP address that you assigned to the local PPP interface on the system is the same as the IP address you entered in the address field in the PPP Communications profile for the system to which you wish to connect To view the Communications profiles for a system a Right click on the desired system in the Navigator window b Select Properties and then click Communications tab in the Properties dialog box 2 If possible verify that an Ethernet connection can be made to the same system a After establishing a PPP connection but before canceling the connection dialog open a DOS command prompt From the Start menu select Programs gt MS DOS Prompt Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Troubleshooting modem connections 155 b Run the ping command by typing ping 47 1 1 10 where 47 1 1 10 is the system s local IP address See Adding a system in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 607 for information about configuring Ethernet and PPP on the system
229. net 1 24 25 3 4 4 5 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 1C Chassis 1C Chassis Server 1000M Cabinet Chassis 51C 060 51C 060 24 25 3 4 4 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 Server 1000M Half Group 060 51C 060E 51C 060E 24 25 3 4 4 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 Server 1000M Half Group 060E 61C 060 61C 060 24 25 3 4 4 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 Server 1000M Single Group 060 61C 060E 61C 060E 24 25 3 4 4 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 Server 1000M Single Group 060E Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Supported systems 31 61C PII 61C PII 3 4 4 5 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 5 Server 1000M Single Group PII 61C CPPIV 61C CPPIV 4 5 5 Communication 4 5 5 Server 1000M Single Group CPPIV 81 81C 060 81 81C 060 24 25 3 4 4 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 Server 1000M E Multi Group 060 81 81C 060E 81 81C 060E 24 25 3 4 4 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 Server 1000M E Multi Group O60E 81C PII 81C PII 25 3 4 4 5 5 Communication 3 4 4 5 5 Server 1000M E Multi Group PII 81C CPPIV 81C CPPIV 4 5 5 Communication 4 5 5 Server 1000M E Multi Group CPPIV CS 1000S Communication 2 3 4 4 5 Server 1000S 1000E PII Communication 4 4 5 5 Server 1000M E Multi Group PII 1000E CPPIV Communication 4 5 5 Server 1000M E Multi Group CPPIV 1000E CPPM Communication 5 m Server 1000E CPPM The 11C Cabinet
230. net Explorer security settings In Windows Server 2003 Internet Explorer is set to enhanced security configuration by default The default settings of the security zones in Windows Server 2003 are also changed Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications have functions that require privileges granted in the Medium low default security template The following procedure Procedure 21 Adjusting Internet Explorer security settings page 110 describes one of the methods used to grant the required access rights to the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web site Procedure 21 Adjusting Internet Explorer security settings Step Action 1 In Internet Explorer click on Tools and select Internet Options 2 Click on the Security tab see Figure 54 Adding Trusted site page 111 3 Click on the Trusted sites icon 4 Click Default Level to display slider 5 Move the slider to select Medium security level for this zone see Figure 54 Adding Trusted site page 111 6 Click on Sites and add the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web site address to the list of trusted sites see Figure 55 Add the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web site page 111 7 Clear the Require server verification check box and click OK see Figure 55 Add the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web site page 111 8 Click OK to save your changes Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Ne
231. net mask Default gateway f pwir l Tver IGSe no ti Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server cos 4 If you have a DHCP server and you want to configure the IP address from the DHCP server select the Use the following IP address radio button Enter the IP address Subnet Mask Default gateway and DNS server information For PCs with two adapters only one default gateway is required Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Network Adapter software 249 To enter WINS server information click Advanced in the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Click OK 5 Reboot the system End Configuring second adapter in a Dual Network Interface arrangement The Telephony Manager 3 1 server or client can have a second network interface card NIC installed to connect to the ELAN subnet of a managed system This can result in the multicast traffic sent on the ELAN rather than on the intended Nortel server Subnet formerly referred to as the CLAN The ELAN subnet must be protected from such traffic To prevent this type of multicast traffic the metric value of the ELAN network interface card must be modified so that it is greater than that of the network interface card connecting to the Nortel server Subnet This c
232. ng the OIT files page 189 for details Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 190 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Telephony Manager OIT files Telephony Manager 3 1 requires the following OIT files for integration with ENMS e NMS _otm_vi0 B oit Telephony Manager server device support entries Telephony Manager Open Alarm I definitions e NMS_otmApp_v10 B oit Telephony Manager Web Application integration entries Telephony Manager also contains the following mib file e rfc1223 mib Standard RFC 12313 MIB definitions Run oitlnstall for each oit file one at a time The mib file must be present in the same directory when oitlnstall is executed See step 5 under Checklist for installing the Optivity Integration Toolkit page 190 Checklist for installing the Optivity Integration Toolkit This section provides general information about OIT Refer to the NTPs release notes and read me files that are provided with your ENMS software package for specific information about OIT OIT files for Telephony Manager 3 1 can be installed on any platform that runs ENMS as long as it supports the Java Runtime Environment required by Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications In this case follow the steps in this section In the case of coresidence you must understand the prer
233. ng up the Metabase Editor utility page 255 Overview The metabase editor utility is only required when working with a Windows XP operating system To modify the ASP session timeout value in Windows XP you must update the IIS metadatabase directly Use an application provided by Microsoft called the Metabase Editor to view or edit the Metabase bin file in C Windows system32 inetsrv This file has the hierarchical configuration information and schema that are used to configure IIS The IIS configuration of folders in the Default Web Site are stored in the Metabase bin Setting up the Metabase Editor utility The following procedure sets up the Metabase Editor utility Procedure 77 Setting up the Metabase Editor utility Step Action 1 Launch the utility Metabase Editor 2 Open Metabase bin and go to LM gt W3SVC gt 1 gt Roots This path has the folders used in Telephony Manager See 3 Change the value of Session Timeout to 90 120 minutes depending on the requirement On the right side there is a Session Timeout value configured as ASPSessionTimeout Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 256 Setting up Metabase Editor utility 4 The Session Timeout value must be entered in all other folders with ASPSessionTimeout as a parameter 5 Select Administrative Tools gt IIS gt Default We
234. ns For these features the access time is critical in terms of the time it takes for a feature to complete an operation Telephony Manager 3 1 disk intensive applications analyzed in this document include e CDR and traffic collection e TBS report generation e Simultaneous Update of Station Data Station Update from a single system is not affected by disk performance as the speed of transmission from the system is slower than the PC accessing its disk e telephone manager Access Physical memory page 274 recommends a hard disk using the ATAPI interface It also recommends a single hard disk To improve performance you can e Use the fastest Ultra Wide SCSI Interface 15K RPM Disk performance increases by a factor of 2 or better This can translate to an increase in feature performance reduce elapsed time and increase simultaneous operations by 50 percent or better SCSI disk drives come in various speeds e Add a hard disk to store Telephony Manager 3 1 Data separate from the OS and Programs If the server PC used is using an ATAPI interface for its main disk C then installing a SCSI interface card and second hard disk to store Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 276 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Telephony Manager 3 1 Data can achieve the majority of
235. nstallShield Wizard Welcome Installed Maintenance mode provides the following options e Modify The Modify option lets the user perform install and uninstall of Telephony Manager 3 1 components such as Web Help e Repair The Repair option performs a reinstall of the existing installation overwriting the existing installation s application files without modifying the data files ATTENTION The Repair option of Telephony Manager does not repair PostGreSQL e Uninstall The Uninstall option performs an uninstall of the Telephony Manager 3 1 installation A warning is issued and the user is prompted to proceed Upon completion the Uninstall Complete window appears For more information about uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 see Figure 138 Telephony Manager InstallShield wizard page 238 Upon completion of the selected Maintenance operation the Maintenance Complete window appears see Figure 20 Maintenance Complete page 59 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software 59 Figure 20 Maintenance Complete Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The Ir dha cce Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager Before Yes want to restart No wil restart my computer later Remove any dis
236. ocumentation acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of the United States Government The Software and documentation are commercial products licensed on the open market at market prices and were developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any U S Government funds The license to the U S Government is granted only with restricted rights and use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause of FAR 52 227 19 and the limitations set out in this license for civilian agencies and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252 227 7013 for agencies of the Department of Defense or their successors whichever is applicable Use of software in the European Community This provision applies to all Software acquired for use within the European Community If Licensee uses the Software within a country in the European Community the Software Directive enacted by the Council of European Communities Directive dated 14 May 1991 will apply to the examination of the Software to facilitate interoperability Licensee agrees to notify Nortel Networks of any such intended examination of the Software and may procure support and assistance from Nortel Networks Term and termination This license is effective until terminated however all of the restrictions with respe
237. ol ists ACLs A This setting is effective only when 115 is using an NTFS file system volume Learn more about preventing file access by anonymous users lt exk e cancel 20 Click Next The IIS Settings Summary screen appears see Figure 88 IIS settings summary page 133 Click Next Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 133 Figure 88 IIS settings summary Security Configuration Wizard x IIS Settings Summary i Before continuing confirm that your IIS settings are correct 9 Tf poled to the selected server this security policy would use the following ITS settings TISAdmin Web service extensions exe Web service extensions di Web service extensions C Program Files Nortel Telephony Manager WebServicestOMNavigator Sys Web service extensions C Program Files Nortel Telephony Manager Tomcat bin isapt_redrector2 dil RPCProxy Ad gt A To change any of the above settings go back to the previous pages in this section and change the selections that determined the setting Learn more about confirming IIS settings Ce yes coea_ 21 After clicking Next on the IIS Setting Summary windows save the Security Policy apply the Security Policy and reboot the system End Nortel Communication
238. ole or project in the Roles Projects database Each time you launch a telemanagement application in Telephony Manager 3 1 your RU license is checked If the number of RUs configured in your system is approaching the maximum for your license a warning dialog box appears If your RU license is exceeded you receive an error message The TBS application continues to collect data however you cannot cost the data and generate reports The GCAS application launches but you cannot generate reports Contact your vendor to obtain a license for additional RUs Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Security device dongle 91 See Telephony Manager 3 1 Telemanagement Applications NN43050 602 for more information Client license When you install an Telephony Manager 3 1 client the host name of the Telephony Manager 3 1 client is registered on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server database Each time a user attempts to log on to the Telephony Manager 3 1 client the Telephony Manager 3 1 software checks the Telephony Manager 3 1 database If the Telephony Manager 3 1 client is not located in the database the TM 3 1 Navigator dialog box appears The clients Hostname and IP are saved to the client database If the IP is changed while the Hostname stays the same then use the client utility The TM 3 1 Navigator win
239. on Microsoft Active server Page ASP IIS WWW Required Required n a Publishing Service Required Required n a Microsoft Required Required Required Windows Script 5 6 IIS FTP Service Required Required n a ATTENTION Nortel does not recommend running more than one Web client from Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional standalone platforms Regional Operating System support The Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 Operating Systems OS are supported for the following languages e Japanese e Simplified Chinese The Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP Professional clients are supported for the following languages e Spanish e French German e Brazilian Portuguese e Japanese e Simplified Chinese Third party software requirements Table 7 Third party software requirements page 40 lists the third party software or firmware included as part of the Telephony Manager 3 1 application Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 40 Preparing for installation Table 7 Third party software requirements MDAC amp Jet Engine 4 0 SP7 MDAC is included in all the supported platforms Crystal Reports 10 0 Runtime JRE 1 5 MsXML 4 0 SP2 Telephony Manager 3 1 uses version 4 0 with Service Pack 2 which is supported on Windows 2000 and XP It i
240. on about the following topics Overview page 207 Limitations page 208 Hardware and software requirements page 208 System integration page 209 Installation and configuration page 211 This chapter provides information about the integration of the HP OpenView HP OV Network Node Manager NNM management platform with Nortel s Telephony Manager 3 1 It discusses the type of integration supported The included procedures provide detailed step by step instructions on how to configure HP OV NNM to access Telephony Manager 3 1 related functionality and information Nortel s technical support for this feature is limited to support of the two software files that are distributed with Telephony Manager 3 1 OtmOpenAlarm mib and OtmStMon exe These files are compatible with the version of HP OpenView that was current at the time your Telephony Manager software was released Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 208 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Limitations Figure 110 Telephony Manager 3 1 alarm integration with HP OpenView Network Node Manager HP OpenView gt Network Telephony M1 Alarms Meridiani Node TM 3 1 Alarms Manager gt Batoe Manager TM NNM As seen in Figure 110 Telephony Manager 3 1 alarm integration with HP OpenView Ne
241. on platforms Table 16 Web support on servers and workstations page 273 outlines the differences observed in Web support when Telephony Manager 3 1 is running on server grade platforms and workstation platforms Table 16 Web support on servers and workstations IIS on Supported Windows OS Concurrent Internet Explorer sessions Only limited by Telephony Manager 3 1 capacity Restricted Access by IP address and domain name When additional clients attempt to access Web Services and there are no available connections an error message appears See Figure 148 Too many users are connected error message page 273 Figure 148 Too many users are connected error message Eror 403 Microsoft Internet Explorer oix J File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea HTTP Error 403 403 9 Access Forbidden Too many users are connected This error can be caused ifthe Web server is busy and cannot process your request due to heavy traffic Please try to connect again later Please contact the Web server s administrator if the problem persists IIS support on the Telephony Manager server To access Telephony Manager Web applications IIS must be running on the Telephony Manager server IIS support on the Telephony Manager server page 273 depicts the versions of IIS supported on the OS platforms Windows Server 2000 IIS 5 0 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300
242. opyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing the client software 67 Figure 24 Welcome screen and Licence Agreement Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard License Agreement ess the PAGE DOWN ke lortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager Release 3 0 Copyright 1994 2005 Nortel Networks All rights reserved Portions Copyright 1993 1995 2005 Avotus Corporation All nights reserved Portions o icti information of Nortel Networks Corporation It may not be copied or distributed fe lm un ecvedto td aes or useda ary marnes ai provided for in said License Agreement except wil written authorization from Nortel Networks Corporation ia Copyright Notice Portions Copyright 1994 Tie AEE ofthe Universy of Collena 4 5 The Server Client installation selection page appears See Figure 25 Select Server Client Installation page 67 Select Client Installation types cannot be changed for upgrades It is preselected based on the existing installation Figure 25 Select Server Client Installation Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard ver Chient Installation lect the installation type Install Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 68 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software 6 The Setup Type page screen appears Figure 26 Setup Type pa
243. ords are connected by an underscore Example For additional information refer to Using Telephony Manager Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Conventions 27 plain Indicates command syntax and system output for Courier text example prompts and system messages Example Open Alarm destination 0 is 47 82 40 2 37 separator gt Shows menu paths Example Select Utilities gt Backup in the Navigator window Acronyms The following are some of the acronyms used in this document API application programming interface ASP active server page CCCR consolidated call cost reports CLAN customer local area network see Nortel server subnet CLI command line interface CND Common Network Directory CRS Consolidated Reporting System DBA Data Buffering and Access DEP Data Execution Prevention DN directory number ELAN embedded local area network ENMS Enterprise Network Management System FTP file transfer protocol GCAS General Cost Allocation System GUI graphical user interface IIS internet information services I O input output IP Internet Protocol ITG Internet Telephony Gateway LAN local area network LDAP lightweight directory access protocol MAT Meridian Administration Tools MIB management information base NIC Network Interface Card Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manag
244. ortel Networks 302 Appendix C Configuring a USB modem Figure 161 Advanced modem settings Advanced Settings for COM3 f7 ise FIFO buffers requees 16950 compatible UART Select lower settings to corect connection problems Select higher settings for faster performance zjx ddi Receive Buffer Loa J H a Iet Butler Low J Hoa 118 COM Port Number COM3 z 11 The COM Port Number select drop down list allows you to change the COM port to which the USB modem is associated and correspondingly change the virtual COM port Select from the list a COM port not in use and which is within the range of COM1 to COM10 ATTENTION If your server has a COM1 the list shows COM1 in use because this is a physically present COM port that cannot also be a virtual COM port If you have installed a multi modem or other multiple serial port cards these cards create virtual COM ports Typically they create 2 4 or 8 virtual COM ports numbered beginning at 3 4 or 5 You may need to change their first virtual COM port so your USB modem is mapped to a virtual COM port in the range of COM1 to COM10 12 When you have made your selection click the OK button If you have changed the COM port the old virtual COM port is removed and the new one created You can now use this virtual COM port in the Telecom Billing System 13 Close all open Device Manager and property dialogs End Nortel Communication Server 1000
245. ossible for Telephony Manager 3 1 to use a VPN connection as long as this is transparent to the Telephony Manager 3 1 application One example would be for a remote user to use the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web client using a VPN connection over the Internet into the customer Enterprise IP network to access the Telephony Manager 3 1 server Bandwidth utilization The trade off is the cost of Telephony Manager 3 1 versus the cost of increased network bandwidth or network subnets When Telephony Manager 3 1 servers are attached to the WAN the customer s network may be impacted but there is a saving on the number of Telephony Manager 3 1 servers needed Never expect to fully utilize Ethernet bandwidth Performance degrades quickly as the utilization exceeds a certain threshold approximately 35 percent Consult the network administrator for details on network bandwidth utilization Table 17 Network bandwidth usage per system page 283 lists the average and peak traffic for the ELAN subnet and Nortel server subnet This is based upon traffic analysis of a system running on a CP4 CPU For a Cabinet system divide the ELAN subnet numbers by 2 except for alarms For the CPP CPU multiply the ELAN subnet numbers by 4 except for alarms Table 17 Network bandwidth usage per system Transfer rate bits second Telephony Manager 3 1 Activity Average Peak Station Add Chg Del Nortel server 32 KB 32 KB subnet Station Sync with PBX ELAN subne
246. ow copying iV D Task scheduler Click the triangle to show more information IV D Time synchronization Learn more about administration options Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 125 Figure 75 Select administration options x Select Administration and Other Options o These administration and other options are used to enable services and open ports 9 ue PAETE ae Select the options used to administrate the selected server I D Erro reporting 7 gt Help and support IV gt Unk tracking for users shortcuts 7 D Local application installation IF D Remote SCW configuration and analysis IV gt Shadow copying WV D Task scheduler IV D Tene synchronization IV D Web proxy auto discovery IV gt Windows User Mode Driver Framework 8 The Select additional services window appears see Figure 76 Select additional services page 126 Accept the defaults for all options ensuring the following options have check marks e Apache Tomcat e Common Network Directory e TMResourceManager e TMSingletonServer e TMTaskScheduler e TMWatchdog e PostgreSQL Database Server Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nor
247. phony Manager 3 0 are applicable to Telephony Manager 3 1 As a part of the Telephony Manager 3 1 upgrade the IP telephones that are present in older releases are rebranded to new corresponding telephone types New functionality is added to the installation application permitting uninstallation of Telephony Manager Client and Telephony Manager Server separately when they are not accessible to each other For more information see Uninstalling Telephony Manager 3 1 page 235 CND 2 1 is the minimum supported level of CND for Telephony Manager 3 1 For more information on CND see Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 Related information This section lists information sources that relate to this document NTPs The following NTPs are referenced in this document Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 Provides information about using the applications and features available with Telephony Manager 3 1 on systems Telephony Manager 3 1 Telemanagement Applications NN43050 602 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 20 New in this release Provides information about the following optional telemanagement applications Telecom Billing System TBS TBS Web Reporting General Cost Allocation System GCAS Consolidated Reporting Sys
248. propriate and then click Next The Computer Name and Administrator Password dialog box appears Enter the computer name and the administrator password and then click Next The Windows Components dialog box appears Select the default values or select specific components as appropriate and then click Next The Date and Time Settings dialog box appears Adjust the Date Time and Time Zone as appropriate and then click Next Wait for the Network Settings dialog box to appear This takes several minutes When the Network Settings dialog box appears accept the default value Typical Settings and then click Next The Workgroup or Computer Domain dialog box appears Make the appropriate selection and then click Next Wait while the set up program installs components This takes several minutes Wait while the set up program performs final tasks This takes several minutes The Completing the Windows Setup Wizard dialog box appears Click Finish to reboot the system End Allowing Telephony Manager 3 1 client access without constant server log on optional Telephony Manager windows and Web clients require an administrator account to be logged into the server at all times since it uses the identity of the logged in user for access To allow Telephony Manager 3 1 client access without logging into the server at all times the following configuration change for Windows server is required Nortel Communication Se
249. pyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 258 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Capacity factors This appendix examines the following areas where capacity is a factor Features running on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and their impact to its resources such as CPU usage physical memory RAM and disk storage Web and Telephony Manager 3 1 clients and their impact on Telephony Manager 3 1 server resources Communication Server 1000 and Meridian 1 systems and their impact on Telephony Manager 3 1 server resources Communications between the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and Communication Server 1000 and Meridian 1 systems Telephony Manager 3 1 Web clients and so on and their impact on the network to which they are connected The Billing applications result in a processor load that is not possible to predict The exact impact depends on several factors including types of reports generated and quantity of data merged It is not possible to derive a general formula to predict the impact of these applications Nortel recommends that these applications be run during off hours and that they not be run in parallel with other resource intensive applications Impact analysis Analysis was performed on the majority of Telephony Manager 3 1 features To simplify analysis only those features that impact these resources are highlighted here Based upon this analysis recommendations are made as to The resources requi
250. r T D Remote access VPN server F gt SQL Server 2000 I gt Telnet server W D Wed server F WINS server Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 122 Windows Server 2003 configuration Figure 70 Role based service configuration selected roles Security Configuration Wizard x Select Server Roles AN ans ONON VARROSEN Bit AEE OE ASNS 9 vev S Select the server roles that the selected server performs F D AD Federation Service Or AD Federation Service Proxy F D Application server R ASP NET session state server F gt OHCP server gt ONS server F l Fie server F gt FIP server F IAS server RADIUS F gt Middie tier application server COM DTC F I SQL Server 2000 F I Wed server zi Learn more about server roles Ea Figure 71 Role based service configuration selected roles scrolled down These server roles are used to enable services and open ports A server can perform multiple Ea 8 a Select the server roles that the selected server performs F D ASP NET session state server F D OHCP server F gt ONS server F D Fie corver F D FTP server F D IAS server RADIUS F D Middie tier application server COM OTC gt SQ Server 2000 PM gt Web server gt WINS server Learn more about server roles a 6 The Select Client Fea
251. r 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 48 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software The following prerequisites are checked e if the operating system is supported by Telephony Manager 3 1 e if the PC has the appropriate software components installed for details see Preparing for installation page 29 The Prerequisite Summary page appears Figure 3 Prerequisite Summary page 48 listing the mandatory software components needed to continue installation Figure 3 Prerequisite Summary Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Prerequisite Summary installed only on are not found on ntemet Information Services WWW internet Information Services FT juntime Er Install fied If a prerequisite component that Telephony Manager cannot install is unavailable on the computer the following message is displayed Figure 4 Prerequisite uninstalled components message Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard 3 Click Next to continue Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software 49 4 The Welcome and Licence Agreement window appears see Figure 5 Welcome and License Agreement window page 49 Read the Licence Agreemen
252. r customer network The first is the size of the largest system for which billing is used and the other is the total number of systems in the network Table 15 Telephony Manager 3 1 capacity parameters page 266 for some practical guidelines on determining if the Telephony Manager 3 1 billing application meets your customer s requirements When CDR is collected and costed the Telecom Billing System TBS generates a separate Microsoft Access database for each individual costing configuration PBX system Each PBX system defined in TBS has a capacity limit of 2 5 million costed call records which is a limitation of the Microsoft Access database used in the billing application While TBS does not enforce a maximum number of systems that is supported we recommend using the above guideline of 10 systems per Telephony Manager 3 1 server configuration to ensure that adequate resources are available The size of the database determines how often call records are archived to ensure that there is adequate capacity to receive additional call records However the larger the database the more often archiving is required to achieve the desired result The recommended maximum of 3 500 lines per PBX is a conservative limit based upon the assumption that a PBX with 3 500 lines generates approximately 800 000 call records per month This leads to an archival interval of 12 5 weeks and allows reporting on 3 months of calling activity within a single databas
253. r group resolution is performed using the Telephony Manager 3 1 user database If the user group mapping is not found in the Telephony Manager 3 1 user database the CND Directory is used If the user cannot be mapped to a user group Telephony Manager 3 1 appears the following message You have not been assigned to an Telephony Manager 3 1 user group Please contact the Telephony Manager 3 1 Administrator e End users Web only User group resolution is performed using the CND Directory If users are not found they are assigned to the default user group End User groups Telephony Manager 3 1 user groups provide the mechanism to control access to the following Telephony Manager 3 1 resources e Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator Navigator and site system level applications Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks User groups 165 e Telephony Manager 3 1 Web Navigator Navigator and site system level applications e Access to telephone manager Administration Web Desktop Services for end users In addition Telephony Manager 3 1 provides the following user management functions e The ability to create delete users and user groups Windows user interface only e The ability to configure Web Desktop Services for end users Web user interface only Creating a user
254. r info event may not need to alert the customer In these cases the customer may want to configure these events in such a way to simply log the incoming event message and not call OtmStMon Figure 123 All Alarms Browser All Alarms Browser Mon Oct 30 16 43 33 Normal Mon Oct 30 16 43 33 pmpkzsS engvest baynetvorks com OTM Server Status Minor Normal Mon Oct 30 16 43 38 pmupkesS engvest baynetworks com OTM event 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 50 1 1 0 5 Normal Mon Oct 30 16 43 38 pmpkzsS engvest baynetvorks com OTM Server Status Minor Normal Mon Oct 30 16 47 09 Normal Mon Oct 30 16 47 09 ver Status Minor Normal fon Oct 1 papk 6 1 4 1 562 5 Normal 70 of S65 Alarms Crticat Major 3 Minoc0 Wesning 0 Noemat 66 3 acknowkedged Fiters Source Procedure 56 Setting up a Telephony Manager 3 1 server object on the Network Map Step Action 1 Locate the appropriate place in the Network Map for the Telephony Manager 3 1 server 2 Select Edit gt Add Object See Figure 124 NNM Edit Add Object page 220 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 220 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView Figure 124 NNM Edit Add Object 134 177 222 Segment Map EZI View Perfomance Configuration Faut Tools Options Window Help default Read write 3 Select Computer from the Symbol Classes
255. rds 253 Testing network cards Test the network cards after you complete the Windows server installation Testing the Nortel server subnet interface Procedure 75 Testing the Nortel server subnet interface Step Action 1 Network connectivity can be verified by pinging a server or workstation known to be accessible only through the Nortel server subnet This could be an Telephony Manager 3 1 Web client or other server From Command Prompt window on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server enter the command ping lt IP address gt End Testing the Embedded LAN interface Procedure 76 Testing the Embedded LAN interface Step Action 1 Network connectivity can be verified by pinging a system on the ELAN This could be the ELAN Network interface IP address of a Call Server for example From a Command Prompt window on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server enter the command ping lt IP address gt End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 254 Windows 2000 Server reference Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 255 Setting up Metabase Editor utility Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview page 255 Setti
256. re installed in the default folder or the folder selected for Core Program German Web Help Installs the German Web Help files These are installed in the default folder or the folder selected for Core Program Core Program Destination Folder Browse button allows the user to select the folder where the Core Program files are to be installed Common Data Destination Folder Browse button allows the user to select the destination folder for the Common Data Clicking either Browse button displays the Choose Folder dialog box see Figure 12 Choose Folder page 53 Figure 12 Choose Folder Choose Folder xj Please select the installation folder Path C Program Files Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 0 Directories B4 My Computer H 3 Local Disk C H E New Volume D 2 vobstorel on 164 164 8 216 E E vobstore2 on 164 164 8 216 F SD view on view M vikasy_OTM_2 1 on view Y H E vikasv_OTM_2 2_new on view Z 428 My Network Places zi E H H Ej cma 8 Specify a destination directory and click OK Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 54 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software ATTENTION You must not install Telephony Manager 3 1 in the root directory for example C During the installation process
257. rectory page 148 Authentication methods can also be configured using the Windows navigator See User authentication page 138 Navigator access is controlled by user group A user s user group assignment determines which features are available on the Telephone features page The User Groups page is also used to indicate which users are permitted to make changes to the General and Keys pages User groups must be added and deleted in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows Navigator Telephony Manager 3 1 is shipped with the following user groups and corresponding access rights e Administrators Full read write access rights Access rights cannot be changed for this user group e HelpDesk Full access to all Web tree items except those under Web Administration Full access to Web Desktop Services including read write and synchronization capabilities Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks User groups 141 Full access to Windows Navigator applications with the exception of ITG Services e EndUser No access to Web or Windows Navigator applications Web Desktop Services is read only Only 21 features are available the rest are hidden e Default No access To view the available user groups click the User Groups link located under Web Administration in th
258. red on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The number of clients and systems that can be connected to a single Telephony Manager 3 1 server Network bandwidth and routing considerations Table 17 Network bandwidth usage per system page 283 and Figure 153 Response Time versus Round Trip Time page 286 show an analysis of the results of benchmark testing which can be used to calculate the resources and connections possible for various Telephony Manager 3 1 server usage scenarios Table 17 Network bandwidth usage per system page 283 highlights the peak and average transfer rates for various Telephony Manager 3 1 activities Figure 153 Response Time versus Round Trip Time page 286 presents a graphical representation of station response time compared with round trip time RTT Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Hardware and software comparisons 259 To aid in this process this appendix analyzes four typical Telephony Manager 3 1 server configurations Use these configurations as examples and the raw table data to extrapolate configurations specific to a given customer or distributor setup These guidelines provide minimum PC configurations for the Telephony Manager 3 1 server Telephony Manager 3 1 client Web client and Telephony Manager 3 1 running in a stand alone mode Hardware
259. rks or to find hosts on remote networks that are not part of the WINS database because name query requests are not broadcast beyond the local subnetwork If WINS servers are in place on an internetwork users do not have to rely on broadcast queries for name resolution because WINS is the preferred method for name resolution Therefore with WINS servers in place LMHOSTS may not be necessary The LMHOSTS file is read when WINS or broadcast name resolution fails Resolved entries are stored in a system cache for later access When the computer uses the replicator service and does not use WINS LMHOSTS entries are required on import and export servers for any computers on different subnetworks participating in the replication Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 290 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Procedure 79 Configuring TCP IP to use LMHOSTS on a Windows PC Step Action 1 Open Network and Dial up Connections 2 Right click the network connection you want to configure and then click Properties 3 On the General tab for local area connection or the Networking tab all other connection click Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Click Advanced click the WINS tab Select the Enable LMHOSTS lookup check box This option is selected by default
260. rus standard amp professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan 9 0 NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Concord Edge Agent 5 7 ENMS 10 4 CallPilot 4 0 5 0 Application Builder Contact Center Manager Administration 6 0 client Remote Gateway 9100 series Configuration Mgr previously known as Remote Office 1 5 2 1 6 0 1 7 PC Anywhere 11 5 Timbuktu Pro 7 8 WebEx 2 4 1 Norton Antivirus standard amp professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan 9 0 NetIQ Agent 6 0 SP2 Concord Edge Agent 5 7 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Windows 2000 Server in Japanese Windows Server 2003 in Japanese Windows 2000 Server in Simplified Chinese Windows Server 2003 in Simplified Chinese Web clients IE 6 Japanes e IE6 or lE 7 Japanese IE 6 Simplifie d Chinese IE 6 or IE 7 Simplified Chinese Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in Japanese Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in Japanese Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in Simplified Chinese Excel 2003 Word 2003 from Office XP in Simplified Chinese 3 1 English server installa tion 3 1 English server installa tion 3 1 English server installa tion 3 1 English server installa tion Software limits 265 CND 2 1 PCAnywhere 11 5 Norton Antivirus standard and professional 2006 McAfee VirusScan Enterprise
261. rver 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 246 Windows 2000 Server reference Procedure 69 Allowing Telephony Manager 3 1 client access without constant server log on optional Step Action 1 log on to the Windows server 2 Go to Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools gt Component Services 3 From the Component Services window expand Computers gt My Computer gt COM Applications 4 Select Telephony Manager 3 1 Application and open the Properties window 5 Select the Identity tab and click on the This User radio button 6 Enter the local administrator account and password 7 Click OK ATTENTION This procedure works for all applications except DECT End Installing Network Adapter software Before configuring the network adapters make sure that the adapters are inserted properly into the slots and RJ45 cables are plugged into the adapters The Nortel server Subnet Interface card is recommended to install on the top PCI slot and ELAN subnet on the second from the top PCI slot Procedure 70 Installing Network Adapter software Step Action 1 In Windows 2000 Setup verify that the Wired to the network check box is selected and then click Next 2 In the Install Microsoft Internet Information server dialog box clear the box and then click Next 3 Click Select from the List in
262. ry screen appears See Figure 30 Installation Summary page 70 listing the options chosen during the installation Figure 30 Installation Summary Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Start Copying Fil Review settings b oping file ng the program files with the settings chi Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing the client software 71 I Figure 31 Setup Status Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Setup Status 000 Telephony Manager is configuring your new software installation Installing Framework a a naaie E a 10 If Cancel is clicked at any time during the installation the Exit Setup dialog box Figure 32 Exit Setup page 71 prompts for confirmation before terminating and rolling back the installation If Yes is clicked see Figure 33 Install interrupted page 72 the installation is interrupted and the system is restored to its original state If No is clicked the installation continues Figure 32 Exit Setup Exit Setup A Ste ae Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 72 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software nnn Treen TT TT Figure 33 Insta
263. s Configures the starting network socket port number for communications between the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web System Terminal see Figure 100 Terminal Properties dialog box page 181 The default is 4789 Typically this does not need to be changed e Help Get context sensitive Help on the application Figure 100 Terminal Properties dialog box Base Pott jrs F Cancel Help Default Virtual ports In the Terminal server application the Virtual Ports Properties window allows the user to enable or disable connection to a particular device It displays the virtual port number for each configured device and the corresponding serial or network settings In the Virtual Port Properties window a tree appears the devices that can be connected through a virtual port For serial ports the window retrieves the available serial ports from the Registry For network connections the window retrieves the site and system information from the Telephony Manager 3 1 database The virtual port for a system uses the same IP Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 182 Setting up the CND server and Terminal server address assigned to System Terminal The tree mirrors the tree in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator It uses the communication profile in System Properties d
264. s Server 2003 A typical client server architecture The Telephony Manager 3 1 client is a thick client that runs on a Windows PC It does not operate in a traditional client server model Rather the Telephony Manager 3 1 client runs similar software to that running on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The Telephony Manager 3 1 client communicates directly with the managed systems and therefore e requires connectivity to the ELAN subnets of those systems e must be operational at the time any operations performed on the client are scheduled to run e if a site or system defines a serial profile for Station Admin physical serial connections must be present between the switch and the server and between the switch and the client PCs Communications profiles are defined on a site system basis and are shared by a server and its clients Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements Refer to Appendix Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines page 257 for more information about Telephony Manager 3 1 hardware requirements Use correct information The information in this document is subject to change For the latest system requirements see the Telephony Manager 3 1 General Release Bulletin Ask the network card manufacturer about the type of network card and the availability of the required software driver Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009
265. s Web pages that contain the include server side include directive and uses notation to refer to a parent directory Procedure 19 Enabling parent paths Step Action To enable parent paths 1 In IIS Manager expand the local computer right click the starting point directory of the application Default Web Site that needs to be configured and click Properties 2 Click the Home Directory tab and then click Configuration see Figure 51 Enabling parent paths page 108 3 Click the Options tab see Figure 52 Options tab page 108 4 In the Application configuration section select the Enable parent paths check box 5 Click OK Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 108 Windows Server 2003 configuration Figure 51 Enabling parent paths Default Web Site Properties emen M M rs D firt Figure 52 Options tab Application Configuration SEN SEN Manifest file name End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 109 IIS modes of operation IIS modes of operation are automated using the script IIS 6 0 can run in one of two possible modes o
266. s domain account or CND There is no default logon name and password for these systems Any user account for example Administrator that is a member of the local Administrators group is always able to log on to Telephony Manager 3 1 In anew Telephony Manager 3 1 installation use any local Administrators group account for the initial log on After logging in to Telephony Manager 3 1 for the first time you can set up additional users and user groups by selecting the following paths To add user groups select Security gt User Groups from the Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator window and then select Configuration gt Add User Group from the User Groups window See Creating User Groups in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 607 for detailed instructions on adding Telephony Manager 3 1 user groups To add users select Security gt Users from the Telephony Manager 3 1 Navigator window and then select Configuration gt Add User from the Telephony Manager 3 1 Users window See Adding Users in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 for detailed instructions on adding Telephony Manager 3 1 users Users that are not created from within Telephony Manager 3 1 do not appear in the Telephony Manager 3 1 Users window Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 178 In
267. s on the version of JRE currently loaded in the system If a version of JRE that is different than 1 5 is loaded in the system and you access Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications you are prompted to install and load Java Plug In 1 5 0_02 the first time that you try to connect to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server With the Java Plug In 1 5 0 _02 loaded Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications load successfully Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Starting Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications 199 If a version of JRE that is higher than 1 2 2 is loaded on the system then Enterprise NMS Web applications that require JRE cannot be launched This can occur even when the lower version is installed but not loaded on the system To successfully launch Enterprise NMS Web applications you must remove the higher version of JRE and run the JRE 1 2 2 setup program JRE release specific to Apache Tomcat Apache Tomcat is associated with the latest Java Runtime Environment JRE installed on the server If that release is removed from the server Tomcat fails The user must update Tomcat to replace the JRE path with a different path To update the Apache Tomcat path as shown in Figure 107 Apache Tomcat Properties dialog page 200 follow Procedure 49 Updating Apache Tomcat path page 199 Procedure
268. s the latest version available Sentinel Driver 5 41 used for dongle support This version is supported on Windows 2000 and XP Netscape Directory SDK version 5 0 for Telephony Manager CND services and SDK version 5 0 for SSL connection Windows Installer 2 0 This is used before we install Telephony Manager on a freshly formatted PC This is the latest version and it is installed for Windows 2000 It is not installed for Windows XP since it is included with the OS ARL for SNMP Version 15 3 The Asynchronous Request Library ARL provides an API for building SNMP manager applications or for integrating SNMP manager capabilities into an existing application ARL is the SNMP stack for Telephony Manager 3 1 for all applications Microsoft Access 97 2000 Runtime PostgreSQL 8 1 PostgreSQL 8 1 is an open source SQL based relational database This is Telephony Manager s telephone database back end Apache Tomcat 5 5 Apache Tomcat 5 5 is an open source Web Server required to deliver JSP pages the technology used for Telephony Manager pages System software release and package requirements Table 8 Meridian 1 X11 system software release and packages page 41 lists Telephony Manager 3 1 software releases and required packages for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel
269. se Disaster Recovery DDR in LD 117 Set open alarm destination in LD 117 Set up Data Buffering and Access in LD 117 m me me ee ee a ee l ee ee Set up filtering in the system to filter out information and minor messages PC server installation requirements For detailed Telephony Manager 3 1 minimum hardware and software requirements see Preparing for installation page 29 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 299 Appendix C Configuring a USB modem Contents This appendix contains information about the following topics Overview page 299 Checking for a virtual COM port page 299 Changing the virtual COM port to USB modem association page 300 Overview The installation program for your USB modem creates a virtual COM port The virtual COM port allows various communications programs to seamlessly operate with USB modems This section shows you how to determine if a virtual COM port is created and how to change which virtual COM port is associated with your USB modem Checking for a virtual COM port Ensure your USB modem is associated with a virtual COM port by completing the steps in the following procedure see Procedure 80 Checking for a virtual COM port page 299 Procedure 80 Checking for a virtual COM port Step Action 1 If running Windows 200
270. sed service configuration selected roles Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 121 page 122 and Figure 71 Role based service configuration selected roles scrolled down page 122 and click Next Figure 68 Role based service configuration installed roles Select Server Roles These server roles are used to enable services and open ports A server can perform multiple roles Yew instatied roles gt Select the server roles that the selected server performs IV D AD Federation Service Or AD Federation Service Proxy F D Application server R gt ASP NET session state server T gt OFS server PM D OHCP server W gt ONS server F gt Fie server F gt FIP server F D IAS server RADIUS F gt Middie tier application server COM DTC I gt Print server Learn more about server roles Figure 69 Role based service configuration installed roles scrolled down Select Server Roles These server roles are used to enable services and open ports A server can perform multiple roles Yew Installed roles X Select the server roles that the selected server performs P F D Fle server F gt FIP server F D 14S server RADIUS PM D Middie tier application server COM DTC I gt Print serve
271. server mode All data is stored on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and accessed by the Telephony Manager 3 1 client The network performance has a significant impact on Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows client server applications In particular the applications are sensitive to the RTT and bandwidth The RTT is important because numerous smaller packets of data are sent between the server and the client Very high bandwidth is consumed because Microsoft Access database accesses by the client require transfer of the entire databases If the RTT or bandwidth is limited it results in performance degradation This is manifested by slow response times and if sufficiently poor may result in failure of operations for example timeouts The demands on the network are illustrated below for the scenario of a logon to Telephony Manager 3 1 from the client followed by opening up an application The measurements were done in a lab environment with a dedicated LAN connection Performance in the customer environment varies depending on network utilization and system size for example number of lines number of managed systems During this operation over 2 MB of Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 286 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines data was transferred and over 7000 packets were transferred bet
272. sing a CSV file See TBS to CND file header conversion page 303 for the TBS conversion table The following procedure describes how to export employee data from OTM 2 2 to a CSV file that can be used to recreate employee data in the CND using the Subscriber Import feature Prior to executing these steps the user must read the Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 section Subscriber import in order to understand the requirements warnings and limitations of the CSV file Procedure 8 Creating the employee csv file Step Action 1 Open the system window and launch the Export Utility 2 Select Corporate Directory Export and click on the ellipsis button to access the configuration dialog 3 Select File Type as Text File Comma separated values 4 Click on the Format button to select the employee fields that you want to export 5 For each field selected make sure the External Column Name matches the supported attribute names in CND refer to Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 Subscriber Import section Header Record description Click OK to save Format settings Click OK to save Configuration settings Click Go or Schedule to run report o Oo N O Repeat the process for each system that you want to have the employee data migrated to CND Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3
273. ssociation 301 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 16 Contents Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks How to get help This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting help from the Nortel Web site The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support Web site www nortel com support This site provides quick access to software documentation bulletins and tools to address issues with Nortel products More specifically the site enables you to e download software documentation and product bulletins e search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues e sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment open and manage technical support cases Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you don t find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support Web site and have a Nortel support contract you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Outside North America go to the followin
274. st disk in step 6 Press Enter to set up Windows server on the selected partition Use the up and down arrow keys to select Format partition using the NTFS files system and then press Enter Wait while the setup program formats the partition This takes several minutes Wait while the setup program copies files to the Windows installation folders This takes several minutes Reboot the system When the system reboots press F2 to instruct the system to boot from the hard drive instead of the CD ROM End Installing Windows server components Procedure 68 Installing Windows server components Step Action Windows server setup continues after the reboot 1 The Installing Devices dialog box appears This takes several minutes The Regional Settings dialog box appears Select the default values or configure as needed and then click Next The Personalize Your Software dialog box appears Enter your name and the name of your organization and then click Next Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 on Windows 2000 Server 245 10 11 12 13 14 The Your Product Key dialog box appears Enter the product key and then click Next The Licensing Modes dialog box appears Select the default value or choose Per server or Per Seat as ap
275. strateurs In the German version this user group is Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 138 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users Administratoren When installed on a French or German OS the Telephony Manager 3 1 predefined administrators user group is named Administrateurs or Administratoren to match the OS User group access rights The network administrator logs into the Telephony Manager 3 1 Administration Web site and assigns access rights to the other user groups By default a member of any group other than Administrators does not have any access to Telephony Manager 3 1 Web applications unless appropriate permissions are specifically granted to that group From the User Groups page access to Web applications to a group not to individual users are either granted or denied To change the security access for individual users their group membership can be changed For new groups the Administrator must assign access rights for Web applications before any users from that group can log on For information about setting user access refer to User groups page 140 With the exception of Administrators a person is not placed in multiple groups The first group detected by Telephony Manager 3 1 is used to determine access permissions There is no restriction on the Administrators group Users ca
276. support Ethernet In this scenario Telephony Manager 3 1 is connected to these systems through their serial ports Physical limitations on serial connections limit Telephony Manager 3 1 to be placed within 15 24 meters 50 feet of these systems to minimize noise which can cause transmission errors It is also possible for the serial connection to be established over a modem connection Note that some Telephony Manager 3 1 applications cannot work over a serial connection For more information see Table 9 CS 1000 and Meridian 1 software requirements page 41 The diagram only shows the Telephony Manager 3 1 server but it is possible for a Telephony Manager 3 1 client to be used The Telephony Manager 3 1 client requires the same serial connections to the managed systems as the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The usual limitations of the Telephony Manager 3 1 client apply such as the need for a high bandwidth connection between the Telephony Manager 3 1 client and the Telephony Manager 3 1 server It is possible for the same Telephony Manager 3 1 PC to have serial connections to some systems and IP connections to others Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 278 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Figure 149 Connecting Telephony Manager 3 1 to legacy systems pre Ethernet
277. sword for accessing both Server and Client machines must be the same lf administrator is the logon id to map the drive administrator must also be the logon id for accessing the client PC If xyz123 is the password to map the drive the same xyz123 must be the password for accessing the client PC Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Overview 63 e Save the logon account credentials from a command line The net use command provides the savecred switch used when the user is prompted for a username and or password Table 10 Formatting legend Italic Information that the user must supply Bold Elements that the user must type exactly as shown Between Brackets Optional items Between braces choices separated by pipe Set of choices from which the user must choose Example even odd only one The syntax for this command is net use DeviceName ComputerName IP ShareName sav ecred OR net use DeviceName ComputerName IP ShareName Passw ord user DomainName UserName savecred The parameters are e DeviceName Assigns a name to connect to the resource The device name can be disk drives that is D through Z or type an asterisk instead of a specific device name to assign the next available device name Computer
278. t 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Conventions 25 Meridian 1 PBX 81 CS 1000M E Multi Group Meridian 1 PBX 81C CS 1000M E Multi Group For more information refer to one or more of the following NTPs Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Small System Upgrade Procedures NN4301 1 458 Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrade Procedures NN43021 458 B1 B2 B3 Communication Server 1000E Upgrade Procedures NN4304 1 458 Communication Server 1000S Upgrade Procedures NN43031 458 Intended audience This document is intended for Communication Server 1000 and Meridian 1 system administrators using a Microsoft Windows based PC for management activities It assumes that you have the following background Conventions working knowledge of the Windows 2000 server Windows Server 2003 Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP Professional operating systems familiarity with Communication Server 1000 and Meridian 1 system management activities knowledge of general telecommunications concepts experience with window systems or graphical user interfaces GUI knowledge of Internet Protocol IP Terminology In this document the following systems are referred to generically as system Meridian 1 Communication server 1000S CS 1000S Communication server 1000M E CS 1000M E Communication server 1000E CPPM CS 1000E CPPM The following systems are referred to generically as Small System Merid
279. t NA 48 KB CDR ELAN subnet 35 KB 70 KB Traffic ELAN subnet 24 KB 48 KB Alarm ELAN subnet 1 KB 3 KB Total ELAN subnet 92 KB 129 KB Total Nortel server subnet 32 KB Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 284 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Alarm Processing There are Telephony Manager 3 1 alarms and IP Line managed system alarms Telephony Manager 3 1 alarm details The Telephony Manager 3 1 Trap server can handle 25 50 incoming SNMP traps per second However this limitation varies considerably with network load PC processing power and CPU availability Traps are stored in a circular queue of 1360 traps You can view the queue using the Web Alarm Browser If the rate of trap arrival is heavy some traps are not entered into the queue even though they are received by the Trap server and Alarm Notification application The circular queue can handle an incoming rate of 50 traps in 10 seconds without any loss of information An SNMP trap has an average size of approximately 400 bytes You can use this information to approximate the bandwidth requirements for trap processing For example 1000 devices each producing one trap every 10 seconds would require a bandwidth of 320 Kbps 400 bytes trap 8 bits byte 1000 devices 0 1 trap sec device 320 Kbps IP Line IP Trun
280. t a CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis system to CS 1000E CPPM in Telephony Manager follow Procedure 59 Converting a CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis to CS 1000E CPPM page 232 Procedure 59 Converting a CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis to CS 1000E CPPM Step Action 1 Run Update System Data in the system window 2 Retrieve all Station data from the switch Before retrieving the Station data ensure that all the telephone records are in Sync status Transmitted use Global Edit if required End To convert a Meridian 1 to CS 1000M E follow Procedure 60 Converting a Meridian 1 system to CS 1000M E system page 233 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Overview 233 Procedure 60 Converting a Meridian 1 system to CS 1000M E system Step Action 1 Select Signaling server present check box in the Network tab 2 Run Update system data from the system window 3 If the old system is Meridian 1 11C Cabinet Chassis and if the new eel is CS 1000E CPPM then retrieve all Station data from the Before retrieving the Station data ensure that all the telephone records are in Sync status Transmitted use Global Edit if required End To convert a Branch Office CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis to CS 1000E CPPM follow Procedure 61 Converting a Branch Media gateway CS 1000M Cabinet Chassis system to CS 1000E CPPM
281. t accesses and modifies data that is stored on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server This data is made available by sharing the Telephony Manager 3 1 folder on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server with all Telephony Manager 3 1 clients Due to the large amounts of data transferred between the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and the Telephony Manager 3 1 clients high network bandwidth is consumed Response time and performance degrade significantly unless the Telephony Manager 3 1 client and Telephony Manager 3 1 server are on the same LAN In general a WAN connection is not suitable Consult the Engineering Guidelines in Appendix Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines page 257 in this document for further details on bandwidth and other network requirements for the Telephony Manager 3 1 client communicating with the Telephony Manager 3 1 server The appendix also provides information about the different network configurations that are possible Windows XP client install and mapped drives After a Telephony Manager client installation reboot files are copied from the server Windows XP does not save the logon account information of a mapped drive If the mapped drive is unavailable this operation fails and causes logon problems which can be avoided in the following 2 ways e Ensure the account used to map the drive is the same account same logon id and password used to logon to the client PC for installation In other words the logon id and pas
282. t and click Yes to accept and continue Figure 5 Welcome and License Agreement window Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard License Agreement 5 The Server Client installation selection page appears See Figure 6 Select Server Client Installation page 50 Select Server Standalone and click Next If all prerequisites are not met installation cannot continue beyond this point Some prerequisites are automatically installed by Telephony Manager 3 1 Note that installation types cannot be changed for upgrades It is preselected based on the existing installation Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 50 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software CO _ lt ee Figure 6 Select Server Client Installation Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Server Client Installation select the installation type Client 6 The User and Keycode information screen appears see Figure 7 User and Keycode Information page 50 Figure 7 User and Keycode Information Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard User and Ke formation Ple Installed By Seral Number Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 20
283. t the rate of one every ten seconds This means the queue can hold 3 7 hours worth of alarms from a single system without losing alarm information Starting with Release 25 of Meridian 1 system software and in all releases of Communication server 1000 software there is the capability of filtering traps on the PBX based upon their categorization for example minor major critical and so on This can greatly reduce the alarm rate by permitting only major and critical alarms to be sent to Telephony Manager 3 1 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Software limits 271 Filtering increases the number of systems that can be connected However when a single system begins having a problem it begins reporting major or critical alarms at the rate of 1 every 2 seconds This means that the queue can hold only the last 45 minutes worth of alarms from the offending system assuming that alarms from the other systems are minimal Billing applications sizing guidelines The Telephony Manager 3 1 billing application is intended for use in small to medium sized customer networks Telephony Manager 3 1 billing is most suitable for networks that do not require substantial data processing or those with many nodes There are two considerations for determining whether Telephony Manager 3 1 billing is suitable for a particula
284. te Sample System txt Sie K fe rera Marker l of Fi Enable All Disable All baad Network connections For a network connection the IP address appears It also indicates whether the system is a Meridian 1 CS 1000 or Generic e Make sure the IP address is correct If the IP address is different from the Telephony Manager 3 1 database s setting click Refresh to update all of the network ports with the latest settings from the Telephony Manager 3 1 database e If selecting an M1 or CS 1000 System the fields for M1 port settings are enabled default SCH The Telnet port field is disabled e f selecting a Generic System the fields for both serial and M1 port settings are disabled The Telnet port field is enabled e Select the Log check box to turn on data capture The log file name defaults to the Site System name plus a txt extension The path and the file name can be changed by typing in the edit box or clicking Change e The maximum size of the log file is customizes in the Size field on a per system basis and defaults to 256 K When the file size reaches the Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 184 Setting up the CND server and Terminal server limit the Terminal server starts from the beginning of the file overwriting the oldest logs Due to the circular
285. tel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager d wil install Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manage on your computer To InstallShield The following prerequisites are checked e if the operating system is supported by Telephony Manager 3 1 e if the PC has the appropriate software components installed for details see Preparing for installation page 29 The Prerequisite Summary page appears Figure 23 Prerequisite summary page 66 listing the mandatory software components needed to continue installation Although the prerequisite summary appears during a client install it is only relevant to a server install Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 66 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 client software Figure 23 Prerequisite summary Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Prerequisite Summary ava Runtime Environment Mictosolt Data Access Component 3 Click Next to continue 4 The Welcome screen and Licence Agreement appears see Figure 24 Welcome screen and Licence Agreement page 67 Read the Licence Agreement and Click Yes to accept and continue Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 C
286. tel Networks 126 Windows Server 2003 configuration S _ lt _X e 10 Figure 76 Select additional services g Select Additional Services N There are services instaled on the selected server that were found while processing the securky configuration database IZ D Nortel Common Network Directory I D PostoreSQl Database Server 8 0 0 1c5 2 Click Next The Handling Unspecified Services window appears see Figure 77 Handling unspecified services page 126 Select Do not change the startup mode of this service Figure 77 Handling unspecified services TTT oo x Handling Unspecified Services N Unspecified services are services that are not instaled on the selected server and not listedin El ia the securty configuration database x y Click Next The Confirm service changes window appears see Figure 78 Confirm service changes page 127 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 127 Figure 78 Confirm service changes xi Confirm Service Changes Before continuing confirm that the service changes resulting from your role and other feature selections are correct If appiied to the selected server this security polcy would use the following service configuration Current Startup Mods Policy Startup Mode Applicat
287. tel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 117 Figure 61 DEP Opiin parameter selected Figure 62 DEP OptOut parameter selected http support microsoft com kb 875352 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 118 Windows Server 2003 configuration Configuring security for Telephony Manager 3 1 To configure security in Windows 2003 first install the Security Configuration Wizard In Control Panel choose Add Remove Programs then click on the Add Remove Windows Components box to the left of the window From the components list check Security Configuration Wizard ATTENTION IIS and FTP services must be installed before completing this procedure Procedure 23 Configuring security for Telephony Manager 3 1 page 118 Procedure 23 Configuring security for Telephony Manager 3 1 Step Action 1 Run the Security Configuration Wizard from Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools see Figure 63 Security Configuration Wizard page 118 Click Next Figure 63 Security Configuration Wizard Security Configuration Wizard Welcome to the Security Configuration Wizard This wizard helps you create a security policy that you can apply to any server on your network The securty policy configures services and network security based on the server s role as we
288. tem CRS Consolidated Call Cost Reports CCCR e Common Network Directory 2 1 Administration Guide NN43050 101 The Common Network Directory 2 1 Administrator Guide provides information on the CND Service and the CND management utilities and tools e Features and Services NN43001 106 B1 NN43001 106 B2 NN43001 106 B3 Describes features associated with systems For each feature information is provided on feature implementation feature operation and interaction between features e Software Input Output Administration NN43001 61 1 Describes the prompts and responses for a system s command line interface CLI This guide includes information about overlay programs that are classified as administration overlays IP Trunk Description Installation and Operation NN4300 1 563 Describes configuration and maintenance of the Voice Gateway Media card This card appears as a 24 port trunk card with ISDN Signaling Link ISL and D channel signaling e IP Line Description Installation and Operation NN43100 500 Describes configuration and maintenance of gateway cards e Telephones and Consoles Description NN43001 567 Describes telephones and related features The telephones provide access to a Telephony Manager generated Corporate Directory e DECT Description Planning Installation and Operation NN43120 1 14 Provides an overview of Telephony Manager for Nortel Integrated DECT DECT systems e Softw
289. ter CPU bus faster memory and so on The PC is still heavily bound to disk access and network speeds Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Network bandwidth 277 Network bandwidth Typical configurations Telephony Manager 3 1 interface access While the connection from Telephony Manager 3 1 to the managed systems may be either serial or an IP connection the Telephony Manager 3 1 applications may be accessed by a variety of means e The Windows GUI and Web interfaces can be used directly on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server e Remote users can dial up to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and use CLI to access the Communication server 1000 and Meridian 1 systems e Telephony Manager 3 1 Web clients can also be used to connect to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server For full access to Telephony Manager 3 1 features the Telephony Manager 3 1 client GUI interface can be used e Connect to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server client using a supported remote access software package for example pcAnywhere This is particularly useful if Telephony Manager 3 1 clients cannot be deployed remotely due to bandwidth limitations Serial connections to systems Figure 149 Connecting Telephony Manager 3 1 to legacy systems pre Ethernet page 278 shows how Telephony Manager 3 1 connects to systems that do not
290. ter connecting successfully refer to Adding a site in Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 to configure your own sites and systems The complete list of Telephony Manager 3 1 configuration procedures includes Configuring Secure Sockets Layer SSL page 85 Configuring a modem for Telephony Manager 3 1 applications page 149 Initial logon page 177 Testing the connection page 94 Security Management page 157 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users page 135 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 94 Before configuring Telephony Manager 3 1 Setting up the CND server and Terminal server page 179 e Configuring the Web browser client page 185 e Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS page 187 e Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with HP OpenView page 207 Testing the connection Use the following procedures to test the connection between Telephony Manager 3 1 and your equipment For detailed instructions on adding sites and systems see Procedure 16 Setting up system data page 101 Ethernet network optional The network interface or interfaces must be configured and connected to the network prior to testing the connection refer to Appendix A Typical configurations page 277 Setting up communications information Pro
291. the CD or unzip the files from the archive into this folder Run the installation program Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 44 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software Web Help Web Help can be installed at the same time as the Telephony Manager 3 1 software installation however the Web Help installation is time consuming The user can install only the Telephony Manager 3 1 software first and then run setup again in Maintenance Mode to install WebHelp later see Maintenance mode page 57 Installation program features Telephony Manager 3 1 server standalone software installation uses the standard Windows installation wizard Users and groups During the installation process Telephony Manager 3 1 adds the Default EndUser and HelpDesk user groups to the server User groups cannot have the same name as a local user on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server If the installation program detects a local user with the same name as one of the user groups that it is attempting to add you are given the option of renaming or deleting the local user or canceling the creation of the user group CAUTION Service Interruption Telephony Manager 3 1 is not supported on a Windows Server system that is configured as a Primary Domain Controller PDC DO NOT install Telephony Manager 3 1 on a PDC
292. the Enterprise Edition are supported Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 38 Preparing for installation Windows Server 2003 R2 is not supported Refer to Product Bulletin Windows Server 2003 R2 Support on TM 3 0 P 2006 0260 Global Rev1 for details Table 4 OS Service Packs Windows Server 2003 SP1 or SP2 Enterprise Edition Windows Server 2003 SP1 or SP2 Standard Edition Windows 2000 Server SP4 Windows XP Professional SP2 SP4 Windows 2000 Professional Table 5 Web browser support Windows Server 2003 IE 6 0 SP1 IE 7 0 Windows 2000 Server IE 6 0 SP1 Windows XP Professional IE 6 0 SP2 IE 7 0 Windows 2000 Professional IE 6 0 SP1 Table 6 Application software requirements Telephony Manager 3 1 PC configuration Internet Explorer Minimum Minimum Minimum 6 0 Required Required Required SP1 Windows only TCP IP Protocol Required Required Required RAS Remote Required Required Required Access Service Java 1 5 0_02 run Required Required Required time environment Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 software requirements 39 Telephony Manager 3 1 PC configurati
293. the Network Adapter dialog box Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Network Adapter software 247 10 11 Click Have Disk and insert the CD from the manufacturer shipped with the network card Click OK and select the appropriate driver from the list Click OK to continue The next widow appears your LAN card Because the server has two LAN cards click on Select from the list to install the Nortel server Subnet Interface card driver and follow the previous step to install the Nortel server Subnet Interface card In the Network Protocol dialog box only select TCP IP protocol and then click Next to continue In the Network Services dialog box you see the following services e RPC configuration e NetBIOS Interface e Workstation e server Click to select the desired services Click Next to install selected components Click OK for Adapter Properties If the ELAN subnet card is the same type as the previously installed Nortel server Subnet Interface card the following message can appear A network card of this type is already installed in the system Do you want to continue Select OK The Adapter Properties dialog box appears for the second LAN card Click OK to continue End Configuring TCP IP Typical configurations page 277 in Appendix A for information
294. the PC modem sends out different tones to negotiate the speed and protocol and the switch modem connects at its configured speed and ignores additional attempts Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Troubleshooting modem connections 151 When the switch modem is connected any additional handshaking tones sent by PC modem are translated into data garbage under this condition and forwarded to the system SDI port These garbage characters can eventually lock up the system port The two modems can still be connected but access to the system overlay input is no longer possible To avoid this type of problem the key is to maintain modem compatibility To avoid potential problems and increase the connection success rate e Configure the PC modem to match the switch modem s settings e The speed between the system SDI port and the system s modem is locked to the system SDI port s baud rate if a high speed modem is installed on the SDI port To minimize the garbage characters after carrier detect or carrier lost situations set your modem S9 register to a higher value for example 30 3 seconds and S10 register to a lower value for example 7 7 10 of a second When increasing the value of the S9 register timing adjustments on some of the modem buffer equipment scripts Troubleshooting mo
295. thor Henry Spencer Copyright c 1986 1993 1995 by University of Toronto CToolbarEx a flat toolbar Copyright C 1997 98 by Joerg Koenig FooWare Java FTP client Covered by GNU General Public License SNMP Construction Kit SCK Copyright C 1998 Yves Soun Covered by GNU General Public License The asterisk after a name denotes a trademarked item All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Restricted rights legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California
296. tion the name of M I T not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of M I T M I T makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty SAX Parser for XML from Apache Version 1 1 for SAX Simple API for XML Copyright c 1999 2000 The Apache Software Foundation http www apache org All rights reserved W3C DOM implementation for Java Copyright 2000 World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique Keio University All Rights Reserved http Awww w3 org Consortium Legal Cryptix MD5 RFC 1321 and SHA 1 NIST FIPS 180 1 message digest algorithms Copyright c 1997 Systemics Ltd on behalf of the Cryptix Development Team In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties Nortel Networks Inc Telephony Manager software license agreement NOTICE Please carefully read this license agreement before copying or using the accompanying Telephony Manager software or installing the hardware unit with pre enabled Te
297. trator and go to the User Groups page To navigate to the Administrator logon page place admin after the Telephony Manager 3 1 IP address or host name in the Web browser Example http TM 3 7 IP address or host name admin 4 Configure the Help Desk Default and End User Access Profiles as desired By default Help Desk users are given read write access to all features Default and End Users have read only access to 21 features To enable Help Desk users to make changes to other user s telephone configuration data make sure that they have access to the Find Telephones page Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 148 Adding Telephony Manager 3 1 Web users 5 Enter the Help Desk user s logon Name and Access Profile in the user s CND Directory entry Enable Web desktop access in the CND Directory page 148 6 Enter the End User s logon Name and Access Profile in the user s CND Directory entry See Enable Web desktop access in the CND Directory page 148 next 7 Select the desired Web Reporting Role in the user s CND Directory entry End Enable Web desktop access in the CND Directory End users access the Telephony Manager 3 1 Desktop Services Web site to view information about and make changes to their telephones Although end users can be given a Telephony Manager
298. tures screen appears see Figure 72 Select client features page 123 Place a check mark in each box and click Next Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 123 Figure 72 Select client features Security Configuration Wizard xj Select Client Features Servers also act as clients These cient features are used to enable services A server can support multiple cient features Select the dient features that the selected server performs IF gt Atomatic update client i gt ONS client IV gt ONS registration client FTP dient normal mode IT gt Microsoft networking cient I gt WINS client Learn more about dient features 7 The Select Administration Options window appears see Figure 73 Select administration options page 123 Accept the defaults for all options ensuring the following options have check marks IIS 5 0 compatibility mode e Task Scheduler Figure 73 Select administration options Security Configuration Wizard x Select Administration and Other Options 8 These administration and other options are used to enable services and open ports 9 yew installed options x Select the options used to administrate the selected server IF gt Application Experience Lookup Service T D Audio
299. twork Node Manager page 208 Communication Server 1000 and Meridian 1 systems Meridian Mail and other devices send their alarms to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server which can then collect the alarms and forward them to the NNM The NNM appears the Telephony Manager 3 1 alarms in its Alarm Browser and updates the color of the Telephony Manager 3 1 object in the Network Map to reflect the current status of the Telephony Manager 3 1 server or the status of the devices the Telephony Manager 3 1 server manages In addition you can also configure the NNM to allow the network administrator easy access to the Telephony Manager 3 1 server See Telephony Manager 3 1 System Administration NN43050 601 for information about configuring the Telephony Manager 3 1 server to forward alarms to an external management station e coresidency is not supported for NNM and Telephony Manager 3 1 on the same PC However for Web clients if the appropriate version of JRE is loaded in the system and the default Web browser is Internet Explorer both Telephony Manager 3 1 and HP OpenView Web applications can be launched simultaneously e The Telephony Manager 3 1 server does not support auto discovery from NNM Hardware and software requirements PC hardware requirements HP OV PC Refer to HP OV NNM documentation for details Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009
300. tworks Windows Server 2003 configuration and restrictions 111 Figure 54 Adding Trusted site Figure 55 Add the Telephony Manager 3 1 Web site Trusted sites 7 End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 112 Windows Server 2003 configuration Remote Desktop and Terminal Server Remote Desktop for Administration and Terminal Server are components of Windows Server 2003 Terminal Server allows multiple remote clients to simultaneously access Windows based applications that run on the server and Remote Desktop provides administrators with remote access to manage the server ATTENTION If Terminal Server is enabled on the Telephony Manager Server it can cause the following problems e When you use Remote Desktop for Administration multiple instances of Telephony Manager may run This leads to data corruption and Telephony Manager can exhibit unexpected behavior e If you have Terminal Services enabled on Telephony Manager Sever the default Windows directory is C Documents and Settings Username Windows If Terminal Services is not enabled on Telephony Manager Sever the default Windows directory is C Windows This change affects the applications installed on the server In Telephony Manager the TBS application fails to open the Call Database Nortel recommends you disa
301. ver names are automatically matched to their corresponding IP addresses However to match server names across remote networks connected by routers or gateways the LMHOSTS file can be used if WINS servers are not available on the network Figure 155 Example of LMHOSTS file part 1 page 288 and Figure 156 Example of LMHOSTS file part2 page 289 show an example of an LMHOSTS file The LMHOSTS file is commonly used to locate remote computers for Microsoft networking file printer and remote access services and for domain services such as logon browsing replication and so on Microsoft TCP IP loads the LMHOSTS file into memory when the computer is started The LMHOSTS file is a text file in the Windows directory that lists the IP addresses and computer names of remote Windows networking servers with which you want to communicate The LMHOSTS file should list all the names and IP addresses of the servers you regularly access For example the LMHOSTS table file entry for a computer with an address of 192 53 63 2 and a NetBIOS computer name of Building1 would be 192 53 63 2 Building1 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 288 Appendix A Telephony Manager 3 1 engineering guidelines Procedure 78 Creating an LMHOSTS file Step Action 1 Use a text editor to create a file named LMHOSTS
302. ween the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and the Telephony Manager 3 1 client Subsequent operations would result in substantially smaller data transfers The impact of the high bandwidth consumption on other customer network applications should be considered when deploying Telephony Manager 3 1 clients on the customer enterprise IP network Figure 153 Response Time versus Round Trip Time page 286 shows the relationship between application response time and RTT in a lab environment Figure 153 Response Time versus Round Trip Time Linear Response vs RT Response Time seconds o 5 10 15 20 25 RTT miliseconds Figure 154 Response Time versus Network Bandwidth page 287 shows the relationship between response time and Bandwidth in a lab environment Note the negative exponential impact of using bandwidth that is less than 2 Mbps Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Telephony Manager 3 1 system performance 287 Figure 154 Response Time versus Network Bandwidth 105 Station Response Time seconds nm 0 2900 4000 600 9 000 10 900 12 900 Network Bandwidth kbits s Hostname resolution LMHOSTS file When Microsoft TCP IP is used on a local network with any combination of computers running Windows 2000 Windows XP and so on ser
303. where u indicates to upgrade ENMS If the u format is not specified only a syntax check is performed on the OIT file This command updates the ENMS database with the new definitions Proceed with Telephony Manager 3 1 installation checking for prerequisites IIS for instance as always End ENMS includes a program oitInstall that extracts the information that ENMS needs for new device application support This information includes database schema definitions MIB information trap information device management application launch points from within ENMS applications device discovery information OIT definitions for Telephony Manager 3 1 reside in 0 THOME OTM otm oit It also contains the file rfe 1213 mib Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 192 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS The O0ITHOME environment variable is typically C Optivity oit on Windows systems and usr oit on UNIX What you do OIT definitions are updated into ENMS by manually placing the OIT files into the appropriate directories and starting oitInstall from the command line For Telephony Manager 3 1 Telephony Manager 3 1 server must be added manually What OIT does The oitInstall program does the following e Automatically stops and restarts all ENMS daemons UNIX or services Windo
304. ws e Automatically backs up the ENMS databases by default usr oit oitdb for UNIX and C Optivity oit oitdb for Windows The oitlnstall program automatically restores the database if the device support upgrade installation fails e Updates ENMS with two new files new device and device management support and deletes the database backup if the integration is successful Using ENMS InfoCenter When Telephony Manager 3 1 is integrated with ENMS and the OIT definition files Telephony Manager 3 1 server objects must be added manually to the resources folders in InfoCenter The Telephony Manager 3 1 integration does not currently support Autodiscovery of these objects You must be logged in as administrator or root to perform this activity Configuring ENMS InfoCenter for Telephony Manager 3 1 Procedure 45 Configuring ENMS InfoCenter for Telephony Manager 3 1 Step Action 1 Create a Voice Management folder in InfoCenter to contain all of the Voice Elements integrated into ENMS Telephony Manager 3 1 in this case 2 Modify the default Properties of the Voice Management folder to display the Optivity Telephony Manager objects added to this folder a Right click the Voice Management folder and choose Properties See Figure 103 InfoCenter Resources page 193 b Open the Management server folder Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009
305. ycle and thus are not supported by Nortel are also not supported by Telephony Manager 3 1 Supported upgrade paths Telephony Manager supports a one step direct upgrade from OTM 2 2 or Telephony Manager 3 0 to Telephony Manager 3 1 An upgrade from OTM 2 2 to Telephony Manager 3 1 will take longer because it also involves the migration of the database Direct upgrades are not supported for customers migrating from OTM releases prior to 2 2 A two step upgrade is required first to OTM 2 2 and then to Telephony Manager 3 1 Refer to Telephony Manager 3 0 Installation and Configuration 553 3001 230 for details of the upgrade from OTM 2 2 to Telephony Manager 3 0 Telephony Manager 3 1 server and clients overview Telephony Manager 3 1 supports both Web and Windows clients The Windows GUI interface has different functionality than the Web browser interface The Windows GUI interface can be used directly on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server or on an Telephony Manager 3 1 Windows client The Telephony Manager 3 1 client accesses and modifies data that is stored on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server This data is made available by sharing the Telephony Manager 3 1 folder on the Telephony Manager 3 1 server with all Telephony Manager 3 1 clients Due to the large amounts of data transferred between the Telephony Manager 3 1 server and the Telephony Manager 3 1 clients high network bandwidth is consumed Response time and performance degrade sign
306. yond unsecure shells must be enabled Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 42 Preparing for installation 2 If traffic is collected through a buffer box only a serial connection is supported 3 Only direct serial connections are supported Modems are not supported Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 43 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 server software Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Overview page 43 Installation program features page 44 Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software page 47 Overview This chapter contains information about e Installation program features and restrictions e Troubleshooting e Installation of new Telephony Manager 3 1 servers An installation checklist is provided Appendix Installation checklist page 297 CAUTION Installing Telephony Manager from the desktop or from a folder that has a longer path name will cause unexpected error messages during the Telephony Manager Server or Telephony Manager Client installation To install the program from a hard drive instead of from a CD create a folder in the root of the drive and name it CD Copy the contents of
307. you must specify a folder for example C Nortel 9 Clicking the Disk Space button in Figure 11 Program and Data Location page 52 displays the Available Disk Space dialog box see Figure 13 Available Disk Space page 54 showing the available disk space in each of the drives on the PC If the selected drive doesn t have enough disk space to accommodate the selected options an error message appears asking the user to select another drive Figure 13 Available Disk Space x r Space paa Available 7520027 K Vv 4 Required 355370 K Lox co Click OK 10 The Installation Summary screen appears See Figure 14 Installation Summary page 55 listing the options chosen during the installation To change settings there are two choices e Click Back to return to the previous screen e Click Next to begin the Installation process The Setup Status screen appears See Figure 15 Setup Status page 55 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks Installing Telephony Manager 3 1 software 55 11 Figure 14 Installation Summary Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Start Copying Files Install Figure 15 Setup Status Nortel CS 1000 Telephony Manager InstallShield Wizard Setup Status installation Install Si eid
308. ype box select the Management servers object type c In the Subtype box select a Telephony Manager subtype for the object In the IP address box type the IP address of the object e Click Private or Global Private lets the local user see the device Global lets all users see the new object f Click OK A default switch icon appears for the Telephony Manager 3 1 server End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 Standard 5 0 3 June 2009 Copyright 2003 2009 Nortel Networks 196 Integrating Telephony Manager 3 1 with ENMS Figure 105 InfoCenter Object Properties dialog box EJ Object Properties Ea Device Link object Labet fot Lab 1 Type ManagementServer SubType optivit Telephony Manager x IP Address fi34 177 222 121 Database C Private Global ok Apply Reset Cancel Help Viewing Telephony Manager 3 1 server object properties Procedure 47 Viewing Telephony Manager 3 1 server Object Properties Step Action 1 In InfoCenter open a folder in the Folders pane 2 Select the Telephony Manager 3 1 server that you added 3 From the InfoCenter menu bar select File gt Properties The Object Properties dialog box appears displaying the properties for the selected network object Click OK End Nortel Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager 3 1 Installation and Commissioning NN43050 300 01 07 St

Telephony Manager 3.1 Installation and Commissioning

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents